Home

Milestone XProtect Corporate Administrators Manual

1. User001 Door053 CS Lets you add an OR operator to the Event message include field With an OR operator you specify that either one or another term must be present Example User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday In the example the term User001 or the term Door053 or the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met The criterion is satisfied even if only one of the terms is present As a rule of thumb the more terms www milestonesys com Page 103 Input Events Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Field Button Remove Description you combine with OR the more results you will retrieve Lets you remove the item immediately to the left of a cursor positioned in the Event message include field If no cursor has been positioned in the Event message include field the last item in the field will be removed Notification Settings Section CA Description Send Email if this event occurs Include image from camera Send SMS if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window see page 80 Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in th
2. Copy and Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar section and paste it to all Paste to All cameras in one go www milestonesys com Page 75 Scheduling Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual General Settings General Settings Window The General Settings window lets you manage a variety of settings such as user rights e mail and SMS settings logging etc To access the General Settings window click the General Settings button in the Administrator window see page 30 Garmi al Seti Arar wo Mov er Crater protection Daren merer t Marsus en Erbie marsasi shart recording Def t duration of mar recording seca Maa dd recording om Meire ET Care a oar Y habi Mesta Protect Carts connechora tris Ata md Dort cond e mail on came a albe Dori sand PO on cam Patry wr M Stat catum m On semaine bee Hm ax V esta del mt Pod ta rem immi Bananen patrol afr manua or event PTE reen Administrator Settings pm ocu x went The Administrator Settings section lets you password protect access to the Administrator application When the Enable Protection check box is selected users must supply the administrator password in order to be able to access the Administrator application and in order to be able to use any of the features to which access has been restricted Changing the Administrator Password To change the administrator password click the Change Password b
3. e Port 20 and 21 inbound and outbound Used for FTP traffic FTP File Transfer Protocol is a standard for exchanging files across networks FTP uses the TCP IP standards for data transfer and is often used for uploading or downloading files to and from servers e Port 25 inbound and outbound Used for SMTP traffic SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a standard for sending e mail messages between servers This port should be open since depending on configuration some cameras may send images to the surveillance system server via e mail e Port 80 inbound and outbound Used for HTTP traffic between the surveillance server and cameras Remote Clients and or Smart Clients and the default communication port for the surveillance system s Image Server HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol is a standard for exchanging files across networks widely used for formatting and transmission of data on the world wide web e Port 1024 and above outbound only Used for HTTP traffic between cameras and the surveillance server e Any other port numbers you may have selected to use for example if you have changed the Image Server s port from its default port number 80 to another port number o Tip Consult the administrator of your organization s firewall if in doubt about how to open ports for traffic If you wish to install configure and run XProtect Enterprise on a Windows Vista computer it is very important that you have administrator ri
4. iios scs Sera o LEER eee UE EEN aer 142 PI s Ibu l cm dentoaaahad 160 Device License Keys How to IMport 0 cece cece eI e emen sese esses ese nene nnn 35 Device License Keys How to Obtain ccc enters 21 Device Managers Reese dt ees 30 Device Packs o oe We Rh rU eR ae ing dela iE EE EIFE Rea FE UE EI RI ada UR IRR UR ERR 160 Device usto CMT 37 40 Device Serial Number sisi rsa oann a E n en ee at de ee See MAC Address Devices Detection of Motion Objects etc on 90 Digital Video RECOFA TEE 36 42 DirectX a pit 16 Disabling a Camera di a ida eo UE De pau Org ba ibi 31 Disabling an Audio lg 31 DISClAIMGE did A Ds 3 Disconnect Matrix Configuration Action 00ooocccccoccncocnconconannnrnconcnn nnn nr narrar rr nnns 138 Disk Space Automatic Response if Running Out of 127 DEKS HOW to MPOT iioc in nih lt 35 H Ce ee ee LC EE EN Domain Control toda 145 Download Manager ii un itp aaa 152 Download Manager Tree Structure in 10 0 cece cece mmm messen 153 Download Page uias temen et RinnU EMI FINERM e EE p a 152 Bi 160 A PEE 168 DVRs o A do 36 42 Dynamilc Archivifig EEN 131 134 E Earlier Version Upgrading TOM As 25 Edit Device Settings Window 00 0 cece cece ene Ims emis mese etie essa ene enean 38 Edit Event Window for Editing Event Buttons 99 Edit OutpuE WIDdOW 3 oot dd IRR DER KR PRI RR OM EE SOROR RR 94 B Mails Aletsch auth th er tmc te ERE E nate cota det
5. sn beh A bx pau eaa EE Ve d RE EE EE 103 Archive Set p NIE dee DASS AE EEN dE enue HERREN UR ER NE REN E RR FRU IMPR RI i Ga iR Ex ad RR UR 130 Archives Backing Ups rt dd RE Cu A RN TERME REA 128 Archives VIEWING sistant eso trem erret re hax iere rai ex a UR ERROR 129 Pel a Klee MH H 125 130 Archiving DyN ME Pat 131 134 le EE 131 133 Audio S CtliNGS EE 45 66 Audio Source Disabling Enabling am 31 67 Audio Source Editing Settings Of an 31 67 A dio APGHIVING TEE 126 134 www milestonesys com Page 195 Index Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Audio Important Information about Using nr nn nr rr rr rn rr rr rra rr 66 Audio Rights to Use in Access Cliente 150 AUD ern 143 158 B Backing Up IEN 128 Ee 145 146 Browse Tab Elentir TET 149 Buffer Pref POSE ais rr dd dn 45 C Calendar Schedule Suminist ARE IRA 73 Camera Administration In Administrator 43 Camera Name and Number Wimdow ccc memi sess ese enn 64 Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window mmn 43 Camera Settings for Device Name VWindow mmn meme nns 40 Camera Shortcut Numbers Assigning c cece eee mmm emnes 31 41 64 Camera Disabling Enabling a 31 Camera Alert Scheduler Window 0c me mmm memes emis nen n e enn 71 Cameras Adding and Configuring in Administrator 43 Cameras En ln Le DEE 31 Cameras Start on Remote Live Reouest cenit 78
6. computers running the Smart Client Remote User s Feature A good set of standard Very feature rich Set features Remote User s Ease of Very easy to use Setup of views can be handled locally as well Use as centrally With central views handling users can begin using their clients instantly upon first login System Administrator s The Image Server and Download Manager runs as automatically Installation installed services on the XProtect Enterprise server Only if clients are required in other languages than the XProtect Enterprise server itself is additional installation required www milestonesys com Page 174 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual The Two Access Clients Remote Client at a Glance System Administrator s Feature Set Smart Client Very flexible configuration through the ImageServer Administrator and Download Manager includes master slaves handling handling of local IP address ranges language versions etc System Administrator s Access Control Options Very flexible choice of creating dedicated user accounts or importing users and groups of users from Active Directory rights for accessing individual client and camera features can be determined on a per user or per group basis Client Flexibility re Limited Future Features and Plugins Recommended Use Systems on which installation of client software is not desirable Systems on which a NET cl
7. Administrator s Manual e XProtect Enterprise s Administrator window see page 30 may appear on your screen during installation When this is the case the window will automatically close again after a short while e Inthe most recent software version a Download Manager see page 152 is introduced and you will have the option of opening the Download Manager during installation The Download Manager is used for managing which features your organization s users will be able to access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server You can open the Download Manager if you like but you can just as easily make changes through the Download Manager once installation is completed Restoring a Configuration Backup if Required If for some reason after installing the new software version you have lost your old configuration you can easily restore your configuration provided you have created a backup of your configuration prior to upgrading the software 1 Drag and drop the backed up configuration files and folders into the new installation directory which by default is still C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance 2 When asked if you wish to overwrite the existing files click Yes 3 Restart your server Updating Video Device Drivers Video device drivers are small programs used for controlling communicating with the camera devices connected to an XProtect Enterprise system Video device drivers are inst
8. Desgaste as Master Server T If Not Using a Master Slave Setup If you do not wish to use a master slave setup for example because there is only a single XProtect Enterprise server on your system simply do not specify anything in the Master Slave Setup section Upgrading Servers in an Existing Master Slave Setup The servers involved in a master slave setup should preferably all use the latest XProtect Enterprise version If you only upgrade to XProtect Enterprise 6 0 or later on the master server while letting the slave servers run a previous version e g XProtect Enterprise 5 6 access client users will lose access to key functionality in their client applications It is therefore highly recommended that you upgrade all the servers involved in an existing master slave setup to XProtect Enterprise 6 0 or later When you do this a certain procedure is recommended The procedure ensures that remote users will not experience any loss of functionality not even during a transition period in which some servers may run XProtect Enterprise 6 0 or later while other servers still run a previous XProtect Enterprise version 1 Install XProtect Enterprise 6 0 or later on the master server 2 In the Image Server Administrator window on the master server select the Pre 6 0 Version Slaves check box Desgaste as Master Server Y Pre 6 0 Version Slaves v Slaves 3 Click OK to close the master server s Image Server Administrator window
9. e Inthe SMS bar active periods are indicated in green 0 e Inthe Patrolling bar active periods are indicated in gray e Changes between patrolling schemes are indicated by a thin vertical line Note that the Patrolling bar is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which patrolling has been set up 5 Tip When several patrol schemes are in use you are able to see which patrol scheme is used for a particular period Click the relevant section of the gray bar the name of the patrol scheme in question will appear in the Patrol scheme list located below the calendar section How to Copy and Paste Schedules With the following buttons you are able to copy and paste schedules and thus save yourself considerable time EX PEA Copy Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar section When used in Schedule combination with the Paste Schedule button you are able to quickly re use www milestonesys com Page 74 Scheduling Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m e schedules from one camera to another Paste Lets you paste a copied schedule for use with the selected camera The same Schedule copied schedule can be pasted to several cameras simply by selecting and pasting to one camera after the other ta Tip If you want to use a schedule for all cameras specify a schedule for one camera then use the Copy and Paste to All button to copy the schedule and paste it to all cameras in one go
10. however that this default may be changed by clearing the General Settings window s Create Default F schedule for new cameras check box od iuda see page 76 If the check box is SE Clemes ENT cleared subsequently added cameras will not automatically be online in dE PENE H i 00 Cmm it an owe E DAS Heat a pare eher motion detec which case online schedules must be reg TLE AA eneen specified manually To access the Camera Alert Scheduler window click the Scheduler button in the Administrator window see page 30 Camera Alert Scheduler Window s Fields and Check Boxes Field Check Description Box Camera Lets you select a particular camera for which to specify or view a schedule in the window s calendar section Note Always verify that you have selected the required camera in the list www milestonesys com Page 71 Scheduling Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Field Check Description Box Mode Online Speedup E mail SMS Patrolling Start event even though schedules displayed in the calendar section may look and indeed sometimes be similar the displayed schedule refers specifically to the selected camera Select whether to add or delete periods in the calendar section e Set Add periods May also be used to overwrite existing periods e Clear Delete existing periods Check the Online box when you want to set or clear online periods for the selecte
11. received on a device s input port for example when an external sensor detects that a door is opened Some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion for detecting moving and or static objects etc configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address in which case such detections from the device can also be used as input events e VMD events occur when XProtect Enterprise detects motion on a particular camera e Outputs are used for activating external output units for example for switching on lights or sounding a siren The I O Setup window is used for defining which input events VMD events and outputs should be available on your system Input and VMD events can be used for triggering outputs or for triggering various actions on the surveillance system itself such as for starting or stopping cameras configured in the Camera Alert Scheduler window see page 71 or for moving a PTZ camera to a particular preset position configured in the Event window for PTZ preset positions on event see page 59 Once you have defined input events VMD events and outputs you are able to associate specific input events or VMD events with specific outputs in the I O Control window see page 105 so that for example lights are switched on when a door is opened or when motion is detected on a camera Outputs may also be triggered by motion detection on a sp
12. see page 86 You have a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs e You are able to select between all available outputs i e outputs defined as output events for the camera itself as well as outputs defined as output events for other devices on the XProtect Enterprise system e The same output may be used for manual control through an output button as well as for automatic triggering when motion is detected Selecting Output for Manual Control You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually from a list in the Remote Client see page 178 or Smart Client see page 175 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way You are able to determine each output s position in the Remote Client s and Smart Client s output list by moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down buttons located to the right of the list The selected output is moved up one step each time you click the up button Lik
13. see separate manual and Smart Clients see separate manual are included in your XProtect Enterprise license and provide flexible client server based remote access to the XProtect Enterprise system with viewing live or recordings from multiple servers simultaneously If you are going to use Remote Clients or Smart Clients configuring the Image Server is a prerequisite Configuration includes specifying whether the Image Server should be accessible from the internet specifying user rights etc If the PDA Server front end see the following is installed the Image Server also handles user rights etc for PDA Client users You configure the Image Server through the Image Server Administrator window described in detail on page 139 LJ Configure the Download Manager The Download Manager lets you manage which XProtect Enterprise related features your organization s users will be able to access from a user targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server Such features include the highly important access clients additional language versions etc 6 Tip The Download Manager comes with a default configuration ensuring that users get access to Smart Clients see page 175 and Remote Clients see page 178 on the welcome page without you having to configure anything Read more about the Download Manager the welcome page users language options etc on page 152 Optional Install and Configure the PDA server The PDA Server
14. thus restarting the Image Server service www milestonesys com Page 142 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 4 Upgrade the slave servers to XProtect Enterprise 6 0 or later 5 When all of the slave servers have been upgraded clear the Pre 6 0 Version Slaves check box on the master server and click OK to close the master server s Image Server Administrator window thus restarting the I mage Server service Keep Transition Period as Short as Possible It is recommended that you keep the transition period as short as possible as client connections security will be considerably stronger once all servers involved in the master slave setup have been upgraded to XProtect Enterprise 6 0 or later and the master server s Pre 6 0 Version Slaves check box has been cleared Also while the Pre 6 0 Version Slaves check box is selected the Image Server Administrator window s Max Number of Clients feature will only apply for Remote Clients not for Smart Clients Log Files Section In the Log Files section specify the number of days to keep log files in the Image Server s regular event log By default such log files are kept for ten days before they are deleted o Tip Read more about logging on page 157 Audit Log Section Audit logging is the logging of access client user actions If this type of logging is required select the Enable Audit Logging check box When audit logging is
15. typically through the device s own configuration web page If audio on a device does not work after enabling it in the Administrator application you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to audio being disabled on the device itself If required you can disable individual cameras and audio sources listed 32 zeen in the Device Manager section When a camera or audio source is disabled no video audio will be transferred from the camera audio e NN reu source to XProtect Enterprise To disable a camera or audio source Edt E right click the required camera or audio source in the Device Manager section then select Disable When a camera or audio source is disabled it will be indicated as follows BR Stairs 10 10 69 1 L Camera c Disabled To enable a previously disabled camera or audio source simply right click the required camera or audio source in the Device Manager section then select Enable E Stairs 10 10 69 1 B Camera c Died Enable Edt Tip Individual cameras can also be disabled enabled in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window see page 43 Individual audio sources can also be disabled enabled in the Microphone Settings window see page 67 and the Speaker Settings window see page 67 Administrator Window s Buttons Button Description Service Opens the Service Manager window see page 70 which lets you Manager pause resume the Milestone Recording Se
16. user group does not have this right private groups in the Remote Client Smart Client will be protected indicated by a padlock icon Denying remote users the right to create their own views may make sense in some cases for example in order to limit bandwidth use 6 Tip By clearing the View Live Browse and Setup check boxes you can effectively disable the user s group s ability to use the Remote Client Smart Client for example while the user is on vacation This would typically be a temporary alternative to deleting the user group 3 In the User Rights for Camera section s Defined Cameras list select each camera to which the user group should have access in the access client OH Tip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting cameras you are able to select several or all of the listed cameras in one go www milestonesys com Page 149 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 4 Click the gt gt button to move the selected cameras to the Viewable by selected user list 5 For each camera now listed in the Viewable by selected user list specify the features to which the user group should have access by selecting the features in the User Rights for the Selected Camera section Note that the features are listed in two columns the left column lists features related to live viewing the right column lists features related to browsing existing recordings In the Liv
17. you will specify the actual camera in the next step o Disconnect then connect Disconnect any existing connection to the camera you will specify the actual camera in the next step then connect again This option is useful because Matrix recipients are often able to show live video from more than one event in which case the live video will appear in the Matrix www milestonesys com Page 137 Matrix Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual recipient on a first in first out basis Each time a new event occurs video from the latest event is displayed prominently in a specific position on the Matrix recipient while at the same time video from the older events is shifted to less prominent positions and eventually pushed out of the Matrix recipient in order to make space for the latest event s video With the Connect option you may thus experience that if video triggered by one event on a camera is already shown on the Matrix recipient videos triggered by another event on the same camera would not be displayed prominently as coming from the latest event simply because the Matrix recipient is already showing video from the camera in a less prominent position By selecting Disconnect then connect you can avoid this issue and ensure that video from the latest event is always displayed prominently Disconnect Disconnect the camera you will specify the actual camera in the next step Use if a partic
18. COM occur SIM card PIN code To access the SMS settings window click the Sms Settings SMS Corl Phone No button in the General Settings window see page 76 Recipient Phone No Heron Enabling SMS Alerts Tee bo naremamora 1 ms Test You enable the use of SMS alerts by selecting the Enable y g Co Cored SMS check box Note When enabling the use of SMS alerts also consider the SMS alert schedules configured for each camera in the Camera Alert Scheduler window see page 71 Specifying SMS Alert Settings Having selected the Enable SMS check box specify SMS alert settings in the following fields e GSM modem con to Select port connecting the computer running XProtect Enterprise to the GSM modem e SIM card PIN code Specify PIN code for the SIM card inserted in the GSM modem e SIM card PUK code Specify PUK code for the SIM card inserted in the GSM modem www milestonesys com Page 82 General Settings Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e SMS Central Phone No Specify the number of the SMS central to which the GSM modem should connect in order to send an SMS e Recipient Phone No Specify the number of the telephone to which SMS alerts should be sent e Message Specify required message text for SMS alerts Message text must be no longer that 100 characters and must only contain the following characters a z A Z 0 9 as well as commas and full stops Note that camera information
19. DETR 6 Tip If you have imported DLKs see How Wed open ond Reeve d DUKE shaw d fo tls bt more Home to Import Device License Keys on page 35 ou the DLK field will already be filled with the DLK for the device ix Carcel Click Next 6 Assign a unique and descriptive name to the Daviea Seres Wizard al device Please enter a name fat thoukd appear for the nie dec device n the sofas Upon completion of the wizard the name will Shon Pos name br the deo device Receptor Set be used when listing devices and associated D the Camera Setup button to sat up camera naman and P T E devices lo in device cameras in the Administrator window s Device Caen ee Manager section The name may for example refer to the physical location of the camera s attached to the device tak Fan cm OH Tip You may click the Camera Setup button to access the Camera Settings for Device Name window see page 40 in which you are able to specify certain settings related to camera name and PTZ control The latter requires that the camera is a PTZ Pan tilt Zoom camera 7 Click Finish 8 The device will be listed in the Administrator window s Device Manager section To view a list of cameras attached to the device click the plus sign next to the device name www milestonesys com Page 37 Device Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 6 Tip In the Administrator application s Device Manager section the white ar
20. Delete Name Address Port Password Smart Client Clear Update Add recipient then click the Delete button You will be prompted to confirm the removal Available only when you have selected a Matrix recipient in the list Clicking the Delete button will remove the selected Matrix recipient You will be prompted to confirm the removal Used when adding a new Matrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one Type a name for the Matrix recipient The name will appear in various day to day usage situations it is therefore a good idea to use a descriptive and unambiguous name Note Matrix recipient names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Net Used when adding a new Matrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one Specify the IP address of the Matrix recipient To jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard Used when adding a new Matrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one Specify the port number to be used when sending commands to the Matrix recipient The Matrix recipient will listen for commands on this port By default port 12345 is used You are of course able to specify another port number Used when adding a new Matrix recipient or editing the properties of an existing one Specify the password to be used when communicating with the Matrix recipient Matrix triggered live video may also be displayed in use
21. Example of Smart Client e With a PDA Client see page 179 installed on a handheld computer device with a wireless connection Example of PDA Client The way remote access is handled at the surveillance system server end is different depending on remote access method www milestonesys com Page 172 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Providing Access through a Remote Client or Smart Client Surveillance system administrators use two administration tools for providing access through the Remote Client and Smart Client The Image Server and the Download Manager e Image Server Recordings viewed by Remote Client and Smart Client users are provided by the XProtect Enterprise surveillance system s Image Server The Image Server runs as a service on the XProtect Enterprise server it does not require separate hardware The surveillance system administrator uses the Image Server Administrator window see page 139 to manage Remote Client and Smart Client access to the surveillance system e Download Manager In order to get hold of a Remote Client or Smart Client users connect to the surveillance system server which will present them with a welcome page The welcome page will list the available clients and language versions The system administrator uses the Download Manager see page 152 to control which clients and language versions should be available to users on the welcome page Providing Access t
22. Height width relationship of an image ATM Abbreviation for Automatic Teller Machine e a cash dispenser AVI A popular file format for video Files in this format carry the avi file extension Browser 1 A software application for finding and displaying web pages 2 In XProtect Enterprise specifically the term Browser may occasionally be used when referring to the Viewer application as the Viewer was formerly known under the name Browser C Carousel Feature for displaying video from several cameras one after the other in a single camera slot The required cameras as well as the intervals between changes are specified by the surveillance system administrator If configured the carousel feature is available in the Smart Client Central Milestone XProtect Central a product available as an add on to XProtect Enterprise XProtect Central provides a complete overview of status and alarms from any number of surveillance system servers regardless of location Codec A technology for compressing and decompressing audio and video data for example in an exported AVI file MPEG and Indeo are examples of frequently used codecs D DirectX A Windows extension providing advanced multimedia capabilities DLK Device License Key a registration code required for every device IP network camera or IP video encoder installed on the surveillance system If you do not have system administration responsibilities you do not have to deal w
23. If typing several user and or group names separate each name with a semicolon Example Alonso Sarah Walters Management Brian Security Hannah Carter Stanislaw Dwayne Smith E Tip Typing part of a user or group name is often enough Example Typing Alon then clicking the Check Names button may be enough to quickly select the user Alonso Rodriguez 3 When ready click OK The required users and or groups will be imported and listed in the User administration window A user imported this way will appear as a Windows or Active Directory User in the list s Type column The user will furthermore be indicated by a user icon without the blue dot used for Basic users Example 8 Sean McDonnell Windows or Active Directory user www milestonesys com Page 146 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual A group imported this way will appear as a Windows or Active Directory Group in the list s Type column The group will furthermore be indicated by a group icon Example amp 3 Test LAB Windows or Active Directory group How to Edit an Existing User Name or Password Editing an existing user s user name or password is only possible if the user in question is of the type Basic user the details of Windows users imported from Active Directory are edited through Active Directory l Select the required user in the Current users list and click the Change password button 2 Edit the user name and
24. If you later change image quality settings and or exclusion area settings you should always test motion detection sensitivity settings afterwards The Adjust Motion Detection window features two sliders one for setting Noise Sensitivity and one for setting Motion Sensitivity Noise Sensitivity Noise is insignificant changes in individual pixels which should not be regarded as motion The Noise Sensitivity slider determines how much each pixel must change before it is regarded as motion Insignificant changes which should not be regarded as motion are considered acceptable noise hence the name of the slider With high noise sensitivity very little change in a pixel is required before it is regarded as motion o Tip If you find the concept of noise sensitivity difficult to grasp try dragging the slider to the left towards the High position The more you drag the slider towards the High position the more of the preview image becomes highlighted This is because with high noise sensitivity even the slightest change in a pixel will be regarded as motion Areas in which motion is detected are highlighted in the preview image Select a slider position in which only detections you consider motion are highlighted As an alternative to using the slider you may specify a value between 0 and 256 in the field next to the slider to control the noise sensitivity setting Motion Sensitivity The Motion Sensitivity slider determines how many pixels
25. Local IP Address vets Et ensues tenis oia 139 140 144 151 Local IP Ranges Image Server Option 140 144 www milestonesys com Page 199 Index Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Log Error VIe EE 159 Log eti To iu aora QUEUE 159 LOG Administrator sais EEUU 157 L0G AU TEE 143 158 LOG EVO A lip ebrios gebe re eine 157 LOG EX POPE iii a A A dade ead sa n af efe dedi a i da aon inan d 158 Log Image Import Service EE 158 Log Image ServGr isses tob eed ERR ERR ea 143 158 Log Recording Server Service 157 LOG OI LT c tate 69 77 157 Logging in ele CEET 20 RTE 150 Loudspeakers Associating with Camera 45 Low Sensor GOING E 89 92 M MAG Address acia 21 39 125 Manually Started Recording iet re reper etr E EAEE A ita Rad 76 Manually Triggered Evento cae 84 96 Manually Triggered Events How to Add 108 Manually Triggered Output reise ve ENER EE ENNEN ES dee deen 106 Manually Triggered Output How to Add 118 Master Server Designating a Server as 142 Master Slave Setup iustos terna ER a ERI RIA 141 151 Master Slave Setup Upgrading Servers jn 142 VEU d EE 33 135 171 Matrix Configuration Window ccc IH mme emm se ese ene es e en nnns 135 Matrix Monitor Application 171 Max Number of Clients Image Server Option 140 Microphone Settings MNP Eed EAR dE eege SE GES ec 67 Microphone Associating with Camera 45 MICFOPNONES HEURE 150 Micr
26. Remove Programs www milestonesys com Page 187 Removal Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select the Milestone PDA Server 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions PDA Client Removal Procedure The PDA Client may be removed in two ways either directly from the PDA or from a PC with ActiveSync Removing the PDA Client Directly from the PDA 1 Tap the PDA s Start button 2 Select Settings 3 Select the System tab 4 Select Remove Programs 5 Select the Milestone Systems PDA Client and tap the Remove button 6 Select Yes when asked if you want to remove the program Removing the PDA Client from a PC with ActiveSync Add Remove Programs able den V enu Fa li d y d d roble mm o clem t you wart lo remove t Note This method requires that the PDA Client was installed on program from your device the PC and transferred to the PDA through ActiveSync D M p E Y TBP Miestore Systema PDAViewer 00k l Connect the PDA to the PD on which ActiveSync and the PDA Client software is installed 2 Use Windows Add or Remove Programs feature to remove the PDA Client software 3 When removing the PDA Client software from the PC this A way ActiveSync will give you the option of removing the ee Bees PDA Client software from the PDA as well provided the Ms SS PDA is connected T
27. Server service by clicking the Administrator window s see page 30 Service Manager button then clicking the Pause button IMPORTANT No video or audio will be recorded while the Milestone Recording Server service is paused www milestonesys com Page 49 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Configure Device Window Note Settings in the Configure Device window are to a large extent camera specific The window s contents will therefore vary from camera to camera descriptions in the following are thus for guidance only The Configure Device window lets you specify image quality settings E such as compression resolution etc for a specific camera You Sese access the Configure Device window by clicking the Image Quality button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name dte window see page 43 The Configure Device window is divided into a Comet Um 19 Camera Settings section and a section with a preview image Doha ode Je Mange vow 706 430 1 keen ovg 42204 Camera Settings Section The Camera Settings section will typically contain controls for compression bandwidth resolution color contrast brightness rotation and similar I nclude Date and Time in I mage I The Camera Settings section may feature an Include Date and Time in Image check box When selected date and time from the camera will be included in images from the camera Note As cam
28. Typically the clock jumps backward from 02 00 DST to 01 00 standard time repeating that hour and the day thus has 25 hours In that case you will reach 01 59 59 then immediately revert back to 01 00 00 If the system did not react it would essentially re record that hour so the first instance of for example 01 30 would be overwritten by the second instance of 01 30 Because of this XProtect Enterprise will forcefully archive see page 125 the current video in the event that the system time changes by more than five minutes The first instance of the 01 00 hour will not be viewable directly from access clients Remote Client and Smart Client see page 172 However the data is recorded and safe and it can be browsed using the Viewer application see page 169 by opening the archived database directly www milestonesys com Page 168 Daylight Saving Time Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Viewer The Viewer is a standalone application which lets you browse and play back video recordings The Viewer also lets you print still images send still images via e mail and export entire video and audio sequences in a variety of formats The Viewer can be accessed in two ways e Ifyou work on the surveillance system server On the surveillance system server the Viewer is automatically installed as part of the XProtect Enterprise installation You access the Viewer from Windows Start menu Select Start gt A
29. Windows Server 2003 IMPORTANT Improper modification of boot ini can render the operating system inoperable Milestone Systems do not assume any responsibility for changes you make to the operating system Adding the 3 GB Switch The following technique can be used to add the 3 GB switch to the boot ini file From a command prompt enter the following to add the 3 GB switch to the end of the first line of the operating system section in the boot ini file requires administrative privileges BOOTCFG RAW 3GB A ID 1 Where RAW Specifies the operating system options for the boot entry The previous operating system options will be modified 3GB Specifies the 3 GB switch A Specifies that the operating system options entered with the RAW switch will be appended to the existing operating system options ID Specifies the boot entry ID in the OS Load Options section of the boot ini file to add the operating system options to The boot entry ID number can be obtained from performing the command BOOTCFG QUERY this displays the contents of the boot ini file at the command prompt A reboot is required after editing the boot ini file for the changes to take effect Removing the 3 GB Switch If you want to undo the 3 GB switch mentioned above follow this procedure Select Start gt Control Panel and double click the System icon Select the Advanced tab and click the Settings button in the Startup and Recovery section Cli
30. With Telnet you can connect to a server from a computer on the network and execute commands through Telnet as if you were entering them directly on the server Windows includes a client for use with Telnet Transact Product available as an add on to this surveillance system Transact handles loss prevention through video evidence combined with time linked Point of Sale or ATM transaction data U www milestonesys com Page 193 Glossary Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual UDP User Datagram Protocol a connectionless protocol for sending data packets across networks Primarily used for broadcasting messages UDP is a fairly simple protocol with less error recovery features than e g the TCP protocol URL Uniform Resource Locator an address of a resource on the world wide web The first part of a URL specifies which protocol i e data communication standard to use when accessing the resource whereas the second part of the URL specifies the domain or IP address at which the resource is located Example http www milestonesys com V Video Encoder Also known as Video Server A device typically a standalone device which is able to stream video from a number of connected client cameras Video encoders contain image digitizers making it possible to connect analog cameras to a network Video Server Other name for Video Encoder VMD Video Motion Detection www milestonesys com Page 194 Glossary Milestone
31. XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Index Net OUT 174 Net Framework Required for PDA Server sss meses esee sens 180 3 3 GB SWitchiInd EE dis 165 A About Adm Feature in Administrator Application 0 cece cece e ee eee eee een eee nents 30 Absolute Positioning Pl Larrain a rs 56 Access Client Solution Choosing a 173 ee e cf EUER 172 Access Clients Maximum Number of Simultaneously Connected ssssssssseeee 140 O A Le taxes EE LL UE mme ds 145 Active Directory How to Import Users from 146 Add New Event Window for Adding Event Buttons oooccccccccccnnccnanncancnnrnnannca rca arc nar rra 98 Add New Event Window for Devices Handling One Input Only sss 88 Add New Event Window for Devices Handling Several Inputs sesssse m 91 Add New Event Window for Specifying Generic Events 101 Add New Output WindOW EE AER de erdt o Maser ege b cU LE qur dE Cr RR Eege 94 Adjust Motion Detection Window sss I memes messen esee nn nne 50 Administrator Application About 30 Administrator le EE 157 Administrator Login Window ccc III memes em he ere enr e nn n n nnn nnns 30 Administrator P ssWOEGd EE 30 76 79 Administrator Viele EE 30 Administrator s Getting Started Checklist memes 21 Advanced WIN O Wisin aid 95 hid teen see eege EES A E dee dE Ee 95 Lim 72 78 80 82 89 92 98 99 104 130 131 AND Boolean Operator
32. a PTZ Patrol Scheme 61 Specifying Timing Settings for a PTZ Patrol SGcheme ren 61 PTZ Patrolling Actions on Detected Motion 62 PTZ SCANNING ELE 62 Fisheye Camera Configuration Window eese nnn 62 Fisheye View Adjustment s s emnes enn 63 Previewing the Fisheye View 63 Ceiling Mounted Cameras cece cece eect eee sem ene 64 Setting a View as Home Position 64 Image Resolution cece ee eee se nme e hens e e nene nns 64 Camera Name and Number Window esee ene nnn 64 AUDIO SOURCE ADMINISTRATION eee HH OO Important Information about Using Audio eese 66 Microphone Settings Window cccoonocoonnconnncannnranancannnrananrnnnnrananeananeanans 67 www milestonesys com Page 6 Contents Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Speaker Settings Window oomccoonocoonoronnncannnrannnrannnrnnnnrannnrnnnnrnanrananensas 67 RECORDING SERVER SERVICE MANAGEMENT 7 68 Using the Recording Server Manager occcoococooroconcnconnncannncannnranancananeanans 68 Starting and Stopping the Recording Server sssssssssssssssssssssrerrerrrrrrer 68 Opening the Administrator Application ooococccocccccnccnccnncnncnannnnnnanncnnns 68 Monitoring System Gtatus eme mensem nennen 68 Viewing Recording Server amp Image Server Log Fles 69 Service Manager WiNdOWe emccoococoonoronnnrannnrannnrannnrananrasnnrananrananran
33. about events see About Input Events amp Output on page 84 The Event Recording Settings section lets you specify where to keep event log files and for how long Event log files should be viewed using the Smart Client see page 175 or Viewer see page 169 e Smart Client n the Browse tab s Alerts section select the required event then click the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected www milestonesys com Page 77 General Settings Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e Viewer Select the Viewer s Alarm Overview control panel then click the Events button to view the events log Path By default event log files are stored in the folder containing the XProtect Enterprise software typically C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Path field or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder Days to Keep A new event log file is created every day Event log files older than the number of days specified in the Days to keep field are automatically deleted By default event log files will be stored for five days To specify another number of days simply overwrite the value in the Days to keep field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of O in the Days to keep field The maximum number of days to log is 9999 Wi Tip Read more
34. about logging on page 157 Advanced Check Box Description Don t send If selected no e mail alerts will be sent if XProtect Enterprise loses contact e mail on with a camera Otherwise e mail alerts will provided the e mail alert feature camera has been enabled in the E Mail setup window see page 80 automatically be failures sent if XProtect Enterprise loses contact with a camera regardless of any e mail alerts periods defined in the Camera Alert Scheduler window see page 71 Don t send If selected no SMS alerts will be sent if XProtect Enterprise loses contact with SMS on a camera camera failures Otherwise SMS alerts will provided the SMS alert feature has been enabled in the SMS settings window see page 82 automatically be sent if XProtect Enterprise loses contact with a camera regardless of any e mail alerts periods defined in the Camera Alert Scheduler window see page 71 Start Cameras may be stopped for example because they have reached the end of cameras on remote live requests Create default schedule for new cameras www milestonesys com an online schedule see page 71 in which case Remote Client see page 178 and Smart Client see page 175 users will not be able to view live video from the cameras However if Start cameras on remote live requests is selected Remote Client and Smart Client users will be able to start the camera in order to view live video from the camera If selec
35. as well as date and time information is automatically included in SMS alerts e Time btw transmissions Specify required minimum time in minutes to pass between the sending of each SMS alert per camera Examples If specifying 5 a minimum of five minutes will pass between the sending of each SMS alert per camera even if motion is detected or events occur in between If specifying 0 SMS alerts will be sent each time motion is detected or events occur potentially resulting in a very large number of SMS alerts being sent If using the value O you should therefore consider the motion detection sensitivity configured for each camera in the Adjust Motion Detection window see page 50 Testing Your SMS Alert Configuration You are able to test your SMS alert configuration by clicking the Test button This will send a test SMS to the specified recipients Note f the Milestone Recording Server service see page 68 is running the button will not be available To make the button available pause the Milestone Recording Server service by clicking the Administrator window s see page 30 Service Manager button then clicking the Pause button IMPORTANT No video or audio will be recorded while the Milestone Recording Server service is paused www milestonesys com Page 83 General Settings Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Input Events amp Output About Input Events amp Output Input received from
36. authentication is called Basic o If using Windows based authentication based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is called Windows current user o If using Windows based authentication which should not necessarily be based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is called Windows e User name Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication Remember that user names are case sensitive so make it clear to the users if any parts of www milestonesys com Page 147 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual their user names should specifically be upper or lower case e Password Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication If using basic authentication users should enter their passwords exactly as you have specified them on the Image Server Smart Client Users When users log in with Smart Clients they must select between using basic or Windows based authentication Provide them with the following information e Server Address IP address or hostname of the Image Server plus any port number required In the Smart Cliente login dialog users will enter this information in a single field called Server Address so if the IP address is 123 123 123 123 and the port number is 80 tell users that the Server Address is 123 123 123 123 80 e Authentication In
37. be able to access from a user targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server e The Remote Client and Smart Client see page 172 Choice of two types of remote access clients each providing users with intuitive remote access to the surveillance system The Remote Client and Smart Client let users view live video play back recorded video activate outputs print and export evidence etc The Remote Client is accessed straight from the surveillance system server through an Internet Explorer browser The extra feature rich Smart Client should always be downloaded and installed on remote users PCs e The PDA Client Server see page 179 Enable remote access to the XProtect Enterprise surveillance system via a PDA Personal Digital Assistant a hand held computer device with a wireless connection www milestonesys com Page 14 Introduction Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e Milestone XProtect Matrix see page 171 Integrated product enabling control of live camera views on remote computers for distributed viewing Once configured Matrix triggered live video can be viewed in Smart Clients or on computers with the Matrix Monitor client application installed Updates Milestone Systems regularly release service updates for our products offering improved functionality and support for new devices If you are an XProtect Enterprise system administrator it is recommended that you check the Milestone S
38. can download the Smart Client software and install it on their computers e Language packs which let users add additional language versions to their existing Smart Clients Users download such language packs from the welcome page e The Remote Client see page 178 Users connect to welcome page and log in to the Remote Client which simply runs in a browser without any need for software installation e Various plugins Downloading such plugins can be relevant for users if your organization uses add on products with the XProtect Enterprise solution The Welcome Page The welcome page is a simple web page with links to downloading or running various features It is available in a number of languages users select their required language from a menu in the top right corner of the welcome page To view the welcome page simply open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the following address http surveillance server IP address or hostname If the Image Server see page 139 has been configured with a port number other than the default port 80 you must specify the port number as well separated from the IP address or hostname by a colon http surveillance server IP address or hostname port number The content of the welcome page is managed through the Download Manager therefore the welcome page will often look different across organizations Initial Look Immediately after you install XProtect
39. clicking the Edit selected button will open the New Timer window see page 93 Associating Event Buttons with External Outputs As is the case with input events see External Input amp Output described on page 84 you are able to associate an event button with specific external outputs This way external output for example the sounding of a siren can be triggered automatically when an event button is clicked Like with input VMD and generic events the association between event buttons and outputs is made in the O Control window see page 105 Add New Event Window for Adding Event Buttons tar tna Du The Add New Event window for adding event buttons lets you specify the settings for an event button You access the Add New Event window gem for adding event buttons from the Event Buttons window see page 96 Select an entry either global or for a specific camera in the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button ao Add New Event Window s Fields Field Description O O Button Read only field displaying the name of the camera for which the event will be related to specified If the field displays Global the event button will be a global event button available for all cameras Manual Lets you specify a name for the event button event name Note Event button names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp INe Ar T Send e mail Select check bo
40. device to view a list of cameras attached to the device as illustrated in the following Select the required camera from the list and click the Device Manager Administrator window s Settings button This will open the BR Back Door 10 10 693 Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in Wb Come which you are able to specify settings for the camera in question P Meeting Room 10 10 50 10 V Camera Settings include the highly important motion detection sensitivity teas settings They also include PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom preset position Ss r d aii To Camera 3 settings for any PTZ cameras supporting preset positions The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window is Y Cones described in detail on page 43 Configure XProtect Enterprise s General Settings The Administrator application s General Settings window lets you configure a number of important settings related to user rights logging e mail and SMS accounts etc The General Settings window is described in detail on page 76 Configure Scheduling You may want some cameras to be transferring video to XProtect Enterprise at all times whereas you may want other cameras to transfer video only within specific periods of time or when specific events occur With XProtect Enterprise s scheduling feature you are able to specify when each camera should transfer video You are also able to specify whether alerts should be triggered if motion is detecte
41. e Single term User001 when added to the Event message include field the term will appear as User001 e Several terms as one item User001 Door053 Sunday when added to the Event message include field the terms will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday When you add several terms as one item appearing as e g User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field everything between the quotation marks must appear together in the package in the specified sequence in order to match your criterion If the terms must appear in the package but not necessarily in any exact sequence add the terms one by one i e so they will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field Displays the string which will be used for the actual package analysis The field is not directly editable However you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where a new item should be included when you click the Add button or one of the parenthesis or operator buttons Likewise you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where an item should be removed when clicking the Remove button The item immediately to the left of the cursor will be removed when you click the Remove button www milestonesys com Page 102 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Field Button Add AND OR Adds the content of the Even
42. enables PDA Client remote access to the XProtect Enterprise system Read more on page 179 Optional Configure Matrix Milestone XProtect Matrix is an integrated product that allows distributed viewing of video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with XProtect Enterprise Read more on page 135 www milestonesys com Page 23 Requirements and Prerequisites Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Installation Microsoft Windows Vista Information If you wish to install configure and run XProtect Enterprise on a Windows Vista computer it is important that you have administrator rights If you only have standard user rights you will not be able to configure the software These restrictions are a part of the User Account Control a security component in Windows Vista Note however that it is possible to disable the User Account Control For more information search www microsoft com for Vista User Account Control or similar Installing the Server Software If upgrading from a previous version make sure you read the upgrade information on page 25 before you begin upgrading Note Do not install XProtect Enterprise on a mounted drive i e a drive attached to an empty folder on an NTFS NT File System volume with a label or name instead of a drive letter If using mounted drives critical system features may not work as intended you will for example not receive any warnings if th
43. folder containing the XProtect Enterprise software typically C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Logfile Settings section see page 76 Administrator log files are named according to the structure AdminYYYYMMDD log e g Admin20070615 log Recording Server Service Log Files These files log activity in the Recording Server see page 68 when it runs as the Milestone Recording Server service A log file is created for each day the service is used Milestone Recording Server service log files are by default placed in the folder containing the XProtect Enterprise software typically C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Logfile Settings section see page 76 Milestone Recording Server service log files are named according to the structure RecordingServerYYYYMMDD log e g RecordingServer20070615 log Event Log Files These files log information about registered events read more about events in About Input Events amp Output on page 84 A log file is created for each day on which events have occurred Event log files are by default placed in the folder containing the XProtect Enterprise software typically C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance Note howeve
44. following command to remove the 3 GB switch from the current operating system boot entry BCDEDIT DELETEVALUE INCREASEUSERVA A reboot is required after editing the boot configuration data store for the changes to take effect www milestonesys com Page 167 Using 3 GB Operating System Virtual Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Daylight Saving Time Daylight saving time DST also known as summer time is the Y practice of advancing clocks in order for evenings to have more daylight and mornings to have less S e Typically clocks are adjusted forward one hour sometime during y the spring season and adjusted backward sometime during the fall emm season hence the saying spring forward fall back Note that use of DST varies between countries regions e S When working with a surveillance system which is inherently Y EY time sensitive it is important to know how the system handles DST Spring Switch from Standard Time to DST The change from standard time to DST is not much of an issue since you jump one hour forward Typically the clock jumps forward from 02 00 standard time to 03 00 DST and the day thus has 23 hours In that case there is simply no data between 02 00 and 03 00 in the morning since that hour for that day did not exist Fall Switch from DST to Standard Time When you switch from DST to standard time in the fall you jump one hour back
45. multiple servers at a time allowing remote user access across systems The Remote Client does not offer nearly as many features as the Smart Client see page 175 However the Remote Client is accessed through a browser and run straight from the XProtect Enterprise server This eliminates the need for installing any client software See system requirements for the Remote Client under System Requirements on page 16 Accessing a Remote Client The Remote Client is run directly from the XProtect Enterprise server you simply access it through a browser 1 Open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the surveillance system server at the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator When you connect to the XProtect Enterprise server you will see a welcome page If using Windows Vista the Remote Client must be added as a trusted site in your browser from your browser s Tools menu select Internet Options gt Security gt Trusted sites 2 On the welcome page select your required language in the menu in the top right corner Then go to the welcome page s Remote Client section and click the required Remote Client language version link Remote Client Remote Client 3 5 nglis Frenc Spanis rel ge Aum Example Selecting welcome page language and required Remote Client language version Number of available languages may be different in your organization 3 Specify your log
46. must change in the image before it is regarded as motion The selected motion sensitivity level is indicated by the black vertical line in the motion level indication bar below the preview image The black vertical line serves as a threshold When detected motion is above the selected sensitivity level the bar changes color from green to red indicating a positive detection As an alternative to using the slider you may specify a value between 0 and 10 000 in the field next to the slider to control the motion sensitivity setting www milestonesys com Page 51 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Define Exclusion Regions Window The Define Exclusion Regions window lets you disable motion detection in specific areas of a camera s images Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background beisa Eur henicn Begieon ux Teen sn Pe ER af mem dl nir Pe mage I hm be cruda bom motor Sector Monon edi nor be Seed p fa mem nat ed ct tae The Define Exclusion Regions window with an exclusion area highlighted in blue You access the Define Exclusion Regions window by clicking the Exclude Regions button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 Defining Areas in which Motion Detection Sho
47. occurs after Specify the amount of time that should pass between the event occurring event button being clicked and the timer event in either seconds or minutes When ready click OK H In the window from which you opened the New Timer window see page 93 your newly defined timer event will now be listed VO Setup Ej Timer event in this example associated with a VMD event listed in 1 O Setup window see 4 c Dice Cam page 86 You may have to click the expand 4 icon El in front of the name of the required STEE device as well as the required main event to Video Serves see the timer event dM rt tmd Feet itd re AY Loera Buttons ul Timer event associated with an event button Dodd mem A Cites p pes att A Esmcira Uca Cami E Precaptcri Camera 1 pa vont fm Tem Evos EI oen Comms 1 A Vides Server Camara 1 You may have to click the expand icon H in front of the name of the required device as well as the required main event to see the timer event Caen ba Goren ven required main event to see the timer event Click OK to return to the Administrator window see page 30 listed in Event Buttons window see page 96 Geserk Events GI Timer event associated with a generic event M listed in Generic Events window see page y 100 You may have to click the expand icon amm in front of the word Generic as well as the Tent c
48. or password as required then click OK Remember to inform the user about the change How to Remove an Existing User To remove a user from the User administration window s list of users select the user in the list and click the Delete button When removed from the list the user will no longer be able to log in Note Using this method to delete a Windows user imported from Active Directory will only remove the user s right to log in with a Milestone XProtect access client it will not remove the user s data from Active Directory What Information to Provide to Users The information you need to provide in order to enable users to effortlessly log in to the surveillance system depends on whether the users are using Remote Clients or Smart Clients If you have PDA Client users see more about the PDA Server and Client on page 179 Remote Client Users When users log in with Remote Clients they must select between using basic or Windows based authentication Provide them with the following information e Address IP address or hostname of the Image Server e Port Port to use when accessing the I mage Server e g 80 e Authentication In the Remote Client s login dialog users will be asked to select between basic authentication or Windows based authentication Windows based authentication may in turn be based on the currently logged in Windows user o If using basic user name and password authentication tell users that the required
49. page 79 in which you specify which login settings the Milestone www milestonesys com Page 76 General Settings Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual XProtect Central server should use in order to access the surveillance system The Enable Milestone XProtect Central connections check box is by default selected Patrolling Settings Settings in this section are relevant only if you are using PTZ cameras for which patrolling has been set up The regular patrolling of PTZ cameras may be interrupted either manually or when a particular event occurs The Patrolling settings section lets you specify how many seconds should pass before the regular patrolling is resumed after a manual or event based interruption Default is 30 seconds The settings in this section will apply for all installed PTZ cameras IMPORTANT Users of the Smart Client see page 175 are in addition to manual control able to stop a selected PTZ camera s patrolling entirely This takes place through a context menu in the Smart Client view Therefore for Smart Client users the number of seconds specified in the Patrolling settings section does only apply when users manually control a PTZ camera not when users stop a PTZ camera s patrolling entirely When Smart Client users stop a PTZ camera s patrolling entirely the camera s patrolling will resume only when the Smart Client user selects to resume it a Tip PTZ patrolling for individual PTZ cam
50. running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 350 MB 150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 10 disk space left IMPORTANT You will lose data from the archives being deleted 3 Ultimately if there are no archives to delete XProtect Enterprise will attempt to resize camera databases by deleting their oldest recordings This will happen if e there is less than 5 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 20 GB plus 1 GB per camera Or e the available disk space goes below 75 MB plus 10 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 175 MB 75 MB plus 10 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 10 disk space left IMPORTANT You will lose data from the archives being deleted When the recording server is restarted upon such database resizing the original database sizes will be used You should therefore make sure the drive size problem is solved or adjust camera database sizes to reflect the altered drive size E Tip Should the database resizing procedure take place you will be informed on screen in the
51. s output ports the output is connected to connected on Keep output Lets you edit the amount of time for which the output should be applied for Specify the required amount of time in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Example The output should be kept for five tenths of a second Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information External Lets you edit the name of the output output name Note Output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Some camera devices only support output names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Testing the Defined Output When you have defined settings for the output in question you are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button Advanced LSK Advanced Window Neneh Settings FipServerPot 2 The Advanced window lets you specify network settings to be used in oon Ey connection with event handling You access the Advanced window by me clicking the Advanced button in the I O Setup window see page ids Me 86 Poling Frequency 1 10 vec 10 L sl cm Port Numbers and Polling Frequency CA PEA Ftp Server Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information from the Port device to the surveillance system via FTP Defaul
52. should apply for a specific camera select the check box next to the name of the required camera Parking Area Camera 1 Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually enabled for the selected cameras Archiving Locations for Individual Cameras Static archiving If the Automatic path selection check box is not selected you must specify an archiving location for each camera This is further described under Static Archiving see page 133 Archiving Locations for All Cameras Dynamic Archiving By selecting the Automatic path selection check box you can specify archiving locations for all selected cameras in one go to a number of drives on your network Archiving will take place dynamically to all selected drives This is further described under Dynamic Archiving see page 134 Selects the check boxes for all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section Clicking the Set all button is thus a quick way to specify that archiving should apply for all cameras listed Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually enabled for the selected cameras Clears the check boxes for all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section Clicking the Clear all button is thus a quick way to specify that archiving should not apply for any of the cameras listed Remember that only when you click OK archiving is actually disabled for the sele
53. the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Administrator window s Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see below in which you have access to settings for the camera in question including e How the camera should record frame rate image quality etc e Where and when to store recorded video from the camera e Motion detection sensitivity e Triggering of notifications and external output and more This also applies if you want to edit the settings for an already configured camera Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window lets you specify settings for a particular camera You access the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 from the Administrator window see page 30 by selecting a camera in the Device Manager section then clicking the Settings button The window contains the following sections and buttons www milestonesys com Canes Settings dor Niche yo Carrera a 1 pardo werg Beard amen ate frames per Second Decor dra settings Begured tamer ste D frames per Second rate icem When bo store mag r dt e dero te W O13 seondis le images 033 mem btw mages F On motor jn event 1 on rm ondes tr Delta settings Max records n Satabane Mas ear Stati dedo tomate aby eter
54. the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at the following destination C MyFiles MySurveillanceSystem Archives 00408c51e181_2 2005 06 01 23 15 www milestonesys com Page 125 Archiving Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video encoder device with several channels the video encoder channel indication in the sub directory named after the device s MAC address will always be _1 Example e g 00408c51e181 1 Storing Archives at Other Locations than the Default Archiving Directory You are of course also able to store archives at other locations than locally in the default archiving directory You may for example specify that your archives should be stored on a network drive When archiving to other locations than the default archiving directory XProtect Enterprise will first store the archive in the local default archiving directory then immediately move the archive to the archiving location you have specified While this may at first glance seem unnecessary it greatly speeds up the archiving procedure which will reduce delays in case of network problems Archiving directly to a network drive would mean that archiving time would vary depending on the available bandwidth on the network First storing the archive locally then moving it ensures that the archiving is always performed as fast as possible If archiving to a network drive note the regular ca
55. the Recording Server service and the Image Server service have been compiled with the LARGEADDRESSAWARE flag This means you can optimize the memory usage of XProtect Enterprise s Recording Server and Image Server services by configuring your 32 bit Windows operating system so that it restricts the kernel to 1GB of memory leaving 3GB of address space for processes compiled with the LARGE ADDRESSAWARE flag This should improve the stability of especially the Recording Server service by allowing it to exceed the previous 2 GB virtual memory limit making it possible for it to use up to 3 GB of memory The change in Windows configuration is known as 3 GB switching When Is 3 GB Switching Relevant For very large XProtect Enterprise installations and or for installations with many megapixel cameras it can be relevant to change Windows settings so that only 1 GB of virtual memory is reserved for the operating system kernel leaving 3 GB for running processes If using Windows default setting with only 2 GB virtual memory reserved for running processes it has been seen that the Recording Server service in very large installations of XProtect Enterprise may e Behave erratically if getting very close to the 2 GB virtual memory limit Symptoms can include database corruption and client server or camera server communication errors e Become unstable and crash if exceeding the 2 GB virtual memory limit During such crashes the code managin
56. the Smart Client s login dialog users will be asked to select between basic authentication or Windows based authentication Windows based authentication may in turn be based on the currently logged in Windows user o If using basic user name and password authentication tell users that the required authentication is Basic authentication o If using Windows based authentication based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is Windows authentication current user o If using Windows based authentication which should not necessarily be based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is Windows authentication e User name Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication Remember that user names are case sensitive so make it clear to the users if any parts of their user names should specifically be upper or lower case e Password Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication If using basic authentication users should enter their passwords exactly as you have specified them on the Image Server o Users with Basic authentication or Windows authentication will have the option of selecting Remember password which will help them speed up subsequent login procedures Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature e Auto login Users will have the option of selecting Auto login in which case the Sma
57. the camera for which you configured the event notification is displayed in your Remote Client see page 178 or Smart Client see page 175 In Windows Start menu select Run and type the following in the Open field e If you are performing the test on the XProtect Enterprise server itself telnet localhost 1234 e If you are performing the test from a remote computer Substitute localhost with the IP address of the XProtect Enterprise server Example If the IP address of the XProtect Enterprise server is 123 123 123 123 type telnet 123 123 123 123 1234 Note In the above examples the number 1234 indicates the port on which the XProtect Enterprise server listens for generic events Port 1234 is the default port for this purpose but it is possible to change this by specifying another port number in the Advanced window s Alert Port field see page 95 If the alert port number has been changed on your system type your system s alert port number instead of 1234 This will open a Telnet window d Telnet loculos BER In the Telnet window type the term so called event substring required to trigger your generic event In our case the required term is video While typing in the Telnet window you may experience so called echo This is simply the server repeating some or all of the characters it receives it www milestonesys com Page 115 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual
58. the camera in question is SJ Wecessori Cone al selected er E soda Caen E soda Camera 2 gu Event Buttons Window pond Cone The Event Buttons window lets you specify event buttons When specified event buttons become available in the Smart Client see page 175 in the Smart Client event buttons are actually not www milestonesys com Page 96 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list Event buttons can be global available for all cameras or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected You access the Event Buttons window by clicking the Event Buttons button in the Administrator window see page 30 Defined Events List The Event Buttons window features a list of specified event buttons When event buttons have been defined you are able to expand elements in the list by clicking zl to get an overview of all defined event buttons global event buttons as well as event buttons specified for individual cameras Example A Global i4 Global event 1 bd Timer event Y A Back Door Camera 1 A Front Door Camera 1 A Lab IPIX Camera 1 Tel Office Camera 1 B4 Event 1 B4 Event 2 Specifying Event Buttons and Timer Events To specify an event button first determine whether you want the event button to be available globally or for a particular cam
59. the capacity of the local drive should be at least twice the size required for storing the databases of all cameras for which archiving has been specified When archiving data from a camera to external locations including archiving locations on network drives XProtect Enterprise automatically checks that the space required for data to be archived plus 1 GB of free disk space is available at the external location If not the external archive location s oldest data from the camera in question will be deleted until there is sufficient free space for the new data to be archived www milestonesys com Page 126 Archiving Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual In short When estimating storage capacity required for archiving consider your organization s needs then plan for worst case rather than best case scenarios e Tip Milestone s server estimator and storage calculator features found in the Support section of the Milestone website www milestonesys com can help you easily determine the capacity required for your surveillance system Automatic Response if Running Out of Disk Space With archiving XProtect Enterprise can automatically respond to the threat of running out of disk space Two scenarios can occur depending on whether the camera database drive is different from or identical to the archiving drive Different Drives Automatic Archiving if Database Drive Runs Out of Disk Space In case the XProtect Enterpri
60. the current administrator password in the Old password field 2 Specify the new administrator password in the New password field 3 Repeat the new administrator password in the New password confirm field 4 Click OK Milestone XProtect Central Settings Window Note Settings in the Milestone XProtect Central Settings window are relevant only if you are using the Milestone XProtect Central add on product in connection with XProtect Enterprise The Milestone XProtect Central Settings window lets you specify aa X the login settings required for a Milestone XProtect Central ee Ss server to access the surveillance system in order to retrieve Pisara artes the engine login inge ul he hilociono Protect Coria Server mus ute to log in status information and alarms To access the Milestone XProtect Central Settings window click the Settings button in the Milestone XProtect Central Settings section of the General Settings window see page 76 Specify login settings for the Milestone XProtect Central server in the following fields c ce www milestonesys com Page 79 General Settings Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e Login Type the name of the XProtect Enterprise server The name must match the name specified on the Milestone XProtect Central server itself Default name is Name e Password Type the password used for accessing the XProtect Enterprise server The password must match the password specified on t
61. the event indicator will light up 3 Repeat for each required event To remove an event from the Active Events list select the event in question and click the button www milestonesys com Page 55 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name Window Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera supporting PTZ preset positions the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window lets you view and for many but not all PTZ cameras define preset positions for the PTZ l T camera To access the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window click the PTZ Preset Positions button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 The button is only available if the camera supports PTZ preset positions Note that if the Milestone Recording Server service see page 68 is running the button will not be available see the description of the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera eem Name window for information about how to make the button P available to Why Use Preset Positions uL Defined preset positions can be used for making the PTZ camera automatically go to particular preset positions when particular events occur and for specifying PTZ patrolling schemes Defined preset positions will also become selectable in the Remote Client Smart Client allow
62. the menu will aros y poes mime display a dialog with your system s version number and om Wies TET Software License Code This is valuable information should Y d you ever need to contact product support Bes Device Manager Section The Device Manager section located in the middle of the Administrator window lists all added devices and attached cameras The Device Manager section thus provides you with an overview of your surveillance Device Manager BR Back Door 10 1069 3 system Y Geen E Meeting Room 10 10 50 10 Until you have added devices the Device Manager section will be empty D Comet The illustration to the right shows a detail from the Administrator window s Camera 2 Device Manager section two devices have been added the first device To Camera 3 has a single camera attached whereas the second device has four T Camera 4 cameras attached www milestonesys com Page 30 Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Adding Devices You add devices through an intuitive Device Setup Wizard available by clicking the Administrator window s Add Device button see also How to Add a Device on page 36 When devices have been added they will be listed in the Device Manager section Clicking the plus sign next to a device in the Device Manager section will list cameras attached to the device Editing Settings for Devices To edit settings for a device listed in the Device Manager
63. the release note When such I O devices are added input on the I O devices can be used to generate events in XProtect Enterprise and events in XProtect Enterprise can be used for activating output on the I O devices This means that I O devices can be used in your events based system setup in the same way as a camera Note When using some I O devices it is necessary for the surveillance system to regularly check the state of the devices input ports in order to detect whether input has been received Such state checking at regular intervals is called polling The interval between state checks called a polling frequency is specified in the Advanced window see page 95 For such I O devices the polling frequency should be set to the lowest possible value one tenth of a second between state checks For information about which I O devices require polling see the release note www milestonesys com Page 85 Input Events Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m e I O Setup 7 vo Setup kax I O Setup Window You access the I O Setup window by clicking the I O Setup button E Gen in the Administrator window see page 30 The I O Setup window A lets you define input events VMD Video Motion Detection events an 7 and output for devices on your surveillance system When events occur they can trigger one or more actions weg e Input events occur when input from an external input unit is
64. the surveillance system server and by selecting check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure you can quickly make the features available again e You can remove features which have previously been made available through the Download Manager This will remove the installation of the features on the surveillance system server The features will disappear from the Download Manager but installation files for the features will be kept in the surveillance system server s Installers folder so you can re install them later if required l In the Download Manager click the Remove features button gt Remove Features ESCHER DASZ Select whech features you would Re to remove bom He survediance server A C Smat Chert Irataller a 2 Inthe Remove Features window select the 23m features you want to remove In the following Leet example we have selected to remove a Spanish gt Remote Chert Smart Client installer and a Spanish Remote TELE Client 7 Spanish gt 7 Smat Chert Language Packs s02 D 3 Click OK You will be asked to confirm that you SS want to remove the selected features If you are sure click the Yes button Ciscoe Cines e You can remove installation files for non required features from the surveillance system server This can help you save disk space on the server if you know that your www milestonesys com Page 155 Download Manager Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administ
65. verify install Microsoft NET Framework and IIS versions is available on page 180 Running as a 32 bit service application E Tip To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer click Start select Run and type dxdiag When you click OK the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open version information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab If the server requires a DirectX update the latest versions of DirectX are available from http www microsoft com downloads Smart Client Operating System CPU www milestonesys com Microsoft Windows XP Professional 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Intel Core2 Duo minimum 2 4 GHz or higher Page 16 Requirements and Prerequisites Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual RAM Minimum 512 MB 1 GB recommended for larger views 1 GB recommended on Microsoft Windows Vista Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended Graphics AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 Adapter recommended 16 bit colors Hard Disk Minimum 100 MB free Space Software Microsoft NET 2 0 Framework and DirectX 9 0 or newer Running as a 32 bit service application Remote Client Operating Microsoft Windows XP Professional 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows System Server 200
66. version When the installation wizard starts click Next to continue the installation and follow the steps in the installation wizard Silent I nstallation For surveillance system administrators it is possible to deploy the Smart Client to users computers using tools such as Microsoft Systems Management Server SMS Such tools let administrators build up databases of hardware and software on local networks The databases can then among other things be used for distributing and installing software applications such as the Smart Client over local networks 1 Locate the self extracting Smart Client installation exe file You find the file in a subfolder under the folder httpdocs The httpdocs folder is located under the folder in which your Milestone surveillance software is installed The path would thus typically be C Program Files Milestonel Milestone Surveillance httpdocs Smart Client Installers version number language language code For example an English language version of the Smart Client installation file could be located at C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance httpdocs Smart Client Installers 3 5b English en US With an extraction tool such as WinZip or similar extract the files contained in the installation file to a folder of your choice When extraction is done the folder to which you extracted will contain a small number of files among these a file with the extension msi The ms
67. which Paul is a member has been given rights to do A B and C the sum of the rights will apply for the user Paul in our example would then due to his group membership have rights to do A B and C E Stave Admisintratica Slave Administration Window i CC let itm tm x The Image Server Administrator s Slave Administration window lets you define all servers required to run as slave servers under the XProtect Enterprise server you are configuring Remember that only one server can be the master server Any number of servers can be defined as slave servers under the master server You access the Slave Administration window by clicking the Slaves button in the Image Server Administrator window see page 139 Roe Sere M Adding a Slave Server To add a slave server click the Slave Administration window s Add Slave button specify the host name of the slave server specify the required port number and click OK This will add the slave server to the Slave Administration window s list of slave servers 0 Tip Instead of specifying a host name when adding a slave server you may specify the IP address of the slave server Simply type the IP address in the Hostname field when adding the slave server Remember that if on a local network the local IP address of the slave server must be used Before you start using your master slave setup remember to verify that e Required users have been defined on the master se
68. which the user has access 4 Click one of the camera links in the test interface s left frame If an image the latest recorded image from the selected camera is displayed the PDA Server is z installed correctly ee PDA Server Installation Troubleshooting The following issues may occasionally occur during or upon installation of the PDA Server For each issue one or more solutions are available PDA Server Cannot Be Installed Solutions e Make sure that IIS is installed e Make sure that IIS is set up to use the correct port default is port 8080 and that the same port number was used when the virtual directory was specified e Make sure that IIS is running www milestonesys com Page 184 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Test Interface Cannot Be Displayed Solutions e Make sure that the NET Framework is registered on the IIS e Make sure that IIS is running Test Interface Is Displayed but It Is Not Possible to Log In Solutions e Start the PDA Server Administrator from the desktop shortcut and verify that the IP address or hostname in the Host IP field points to your Image Server Also make sure that the port number in the Port field matches the port number on which the Image Server service is running e Make sure that the Image Server service is running on the surveillance system Make sure that the user account used when accessing the test interface has been cor
69. window s Camera list Set and Clear Modes Depending on your selection in the Mode list you Set or Clear periods in the calendar Your selection is indicated by your mouse pointer turning into either a pencil Set or an eraser Clear when inside the calendar section A al Zoom Feature When placing your mouse pointer inside the day band in the top part of the calendar section you get access to the calendar s zoom feature With the zoom feature you are able to toggle between the calendar s default seven day view and a single day view The single day view provides you with five minute interval indications allowing you to specify periods precisely Sunday Honday Tuesday Monday 14 05 AAA Zoom feature allows you to toggle between seven day and single day views How to Set or Clear Periods in the Calendar To set or clear a period in the Camera Alert Scheduler window s calendar section simply click at the required start point in the calendar and drag to set clear a period depending on whether you have selected Set or Clear in the window s Mode list www milestonesys com Page 73 Scheduling Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Good to Know when You Set Online Periods When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer video to the XProtect Enterprise software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified pe
70. 3 HEES ee 84 100 101 Uninstalatio estilistas os 186 elef 15 www milestonesys com Page 204 Index Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Upgrading from a Previous Version 25 RT LI ULT 163 User Administration WIFIQOW soie etri ea iaa 144 User Administration in Image Server Administrator window 141 User Rights Defining for Remote Access ssssssssssssssseesem meses 141 148 Users Defining for Remote Access cc cece eect eee eee eee een ene nn esses enn nnne 141 144 NM Versi n NforiMatlon EE 30 70 Video Device Drivers EE 160 Alo oen sero SP EUER 36 40 126 Video Encoder Device License Keys for 21 35 Video Encoder PTZ Cameras Attacted to 40 A Eeer E E AEE TA aR EEA EA See Video Encoder ENEE e a a EE E EE 129 169 Viewer Repairing Archived Corrupted Database with 48 Virtual Memory Operating SyStem nn nn nrn ses se ense ene eee nnn 165 Virus Scanning Negative Effect on System Performance 162 Vista Important Information for Users of 24 Aure TTL 45 46 50 VMD EVENTS d S me 84 86 VMD Events HOW to Add iii reed EEN EE ded Riker Pa reed aea r tese e Ur Deka sw ANEN ie 110 VMD Disabling in Parts of Image 52 VMD How PTZ Patrolling Should React on 62 MD Output EE 54 106 W Welcome Page with End User Features 152 Windows Usets iii dd ais 145 146 Windows Vista Important Informa
71. 3 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit If running Windows Vista the Remote Client must be added as a trusted site in your browser CPU Intel Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or higher RAM Minimum 256 MB 512 MB recommended for larger views 1 GB recommended on Microsoft Windows Vista Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended Graphics AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 Adapter recommended 16 bit colors Hard Disk Minimum 10 MB free Space Software DirectX 9 0 or newer Running as a 32 bit service application o Tip To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer click Start select Run and type dxdiag When you click OK the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open version information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab If the server requires a DirectX update the latest versions of DirectX are available from http www microsoft com downloads PDA Server The PDA Server is typically installed on the surveillance system server see the system requirements for the surveillance system server Note however that to run the PDA Server the following is also required on the surveillance system server e Internet Information Services IIS 5 0 or later e Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Note that later versions of Net Framework may also be present on the server If NET F
72. 6 5 Administrator s Manual Then Making New Features Available through Download Manager When you have installed new features such as Smart Client language versions language packs etc they will by default be selected in the Download Manager and thus immediately be available to users via the welcome page You can always show or hide features on the welcome page by selecting or clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure In this example we have specified that users who select the Spanish language version of the welcome page should have access to a Spanish version of the Smart Client English and Spanish versions of the Remote Client and a French language pack for the Smart Client e Tip You can change the sequence in which features and languages are displayed on the welcome page In the Download manager s tree structure simply drag items and drop them at the required position Drwlesd Manager Lg rien gen am Can rage hom fe arsino verve nes Fre remo She rm Vo m rm v Spanish v Smart Client Installer gt M35 C English Spanish v Remote Cent 735 English Spanish v Smat Client Language Packs SE 7 French dnm tam Hiding and Removing Features You can remove features in several ways e You can hide features from the welcome page by clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure In that case the features will still be installed on
73. A Server solution you may also want to remove the PDA Server software from the server see page 187 Removing Individual Components Removing the Surveillance Server Software To remove the XProtect Enterprise server software including the Viewer but no other surveillance system components such as the Download Manager or the Smart Client do the following 1 Shut down all XProtect Enterprise components 2 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 3 In the Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select the Milestone XProtect Enterprise entry not the Milestone XProtect Enterprise system entry and click the Remove button 4 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove XProtect Enterprise If you are sure that you want to remove the software click OK e Ifa Status Information window appears on your screen during installation simply click its OK button the window simply provides a summary of what has been removed www milestonesys com Page 186 Video Device Drivers Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 5 Click Finish Removing Video Device Drivers Video device drivers are small programs used for controlling communicating with the camera devices connected to an XProtect Enterprise system To remove the video device drivers do the following 1 Open Windows Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 2 Inthe Add o
74. A vital part of XProtect Enterprise recordings are only transferred to the surveillance system while the Recording Server service is running Remote Client Client application for letting remote users access the surveillance system in order to view live video play back recorded video activate outputs print and export evidence etc access to features depend on individual user rights Users access the Remote Client straight from the surveillance system server through an Internet Explorer browser S SDK Software Development Kit a programming package enabling software developers to create applications for use with a specific platform SIM Subscriber Identity Module a small card inserted into a GSM mobile phone a GSM modem etc The SIM card is used to identify and authenticate the user SLC Software License Code a product registration code required for using the surveillance system software If you do not have system administration responsibilities you do not have to deal with SLCs System administrators use SLCs when installing and registering the software Smart Client Advanced client application for letting remote users access the surveillance system in order to view live video play back recorded video activate outputs print and export evidence etc access to features depend on individual user rights The Smart Client offers considerably more features than its sister application the Remote Client Such extra features include
75. Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual o Tip If you have several cameras and several local drives are available performance can be improved by distributing the databases of individual cameras across the local drives e Incase of database failure take the following action Select which action to take if the database becomes corrupted The number of available actions depends on whether archiving has been enabled You enable archiving for a camera in the Archive setup window see page 130 accessed from the Administrator window see page 30 by clicking the Archive Setup button O Repair Scan Delete if fails Default action If the database becomes corrupted two different repair methods will be attempted a fast repair and a thorough repair If both repair methods fail the contents of the database will be deleted Repair Delete if fails If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be attempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be deleted Repair Archive if fails Available only if archiving is enabled for the camera If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be attempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be archived This action is recommended if archiving is enabled for the camera Delete no repair If the database becomes corrupted the contents of the database will be deleted Archive no repair Available only
76. Central REGEEE et ees eege a ans 76 79 Checklist Administrator s Getting Gtarted mme mesh 21 Client Solution CHOOSING Avec ro ia i n de 173 Cl a ri o Di ie 172 Clients Maximum Number of Simultaneously Connected cococcccoccncnccncnnoncnnnnnnnnnnonnnananannnnnnns 140 Configure Device WiINdOW iii a Ee equ epa i ae du Ra Ee dE AE EEN 50 Connect Matrix Configuration Action 137 Connect then Disconnect Matrix Configuration Action sss nemen 137 Copying Pasting SGchecdules meme memeneeemes emesis emis ess re shes 74 GEIER ee ee e ee 3 Corrupted Database Avoiding a cai 163 Corrupted Database Repairing rote RR ea 48 CPU Minimum Requirements ENNEN NEEN EERSTEN meer eee ees Pe Ee eerta aeneae da bit uei rer DL ERE Er YE 16 D Databases 44 46 71 125 126 Database UE 48 Database EL DEE 48 128 Database How Use of Audio Affects ooccococcncoccccnccccncnncnnnccnnnennnnn nn nn sehe messen esee enn nnn 66 Database Maximum Size mera a ica 46 Database Protecting from Corruption ocooccccccncnccncnncncncnnnnnnncnnnncnnnnnnrnrnnrrnnrrrrnr emen 163 Date amp Time iri image cio E 50 Daylight SAVING TIME TEE 168 www milestonesys com Page 196 Index Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Define Exclusion Regions Wipdouw rr rn rr rr rr rr eene nn 52 Define Local IP Ranges WINGOW wis winnie 144 Define User Rights WIDOOW egene Ae ee eege Eege vivternaoies 148 Designate as Master Server
77. Depending on your configuration motion detection sensitivity settings may determine when recordings from the camera are transferred to the surveillance system when alerts are generated when external outputs such as lights or sirens are triggered etc Motion detection sensitivity is therefore a key element in your XProtect www milestonesys com Page 50 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Enterprise surveillance solution and time spent on finding the best possible motion detection settings for each camera may help you later avoid unnecessary alerts etc Depending on the physical location of the camera it may be a very good idea to test motion detection settings under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather etc You access the Adjust Motion Detection window by clicking the Motion Detection button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 Note Before you configure motion detection sensitivity for a camera it is highly recommended that you have configured the camera s image quality settings such as resolution compression etc in the Configure Device window see page 50 and that you have specified any areas to be excluded from motion detection for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background in the Define Exclusion Regions window see page 52
78. Enterprise the welcome page will provide access to two features A Smart Client and a Remote Client in language versions matching the language version of your XProtect Enterprise system Examples e f you have installed an English language version of the XProtect Enterprise software the two access clients will initially be in English www milestonesys com Page 152 Download Manager Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e f you have installed a Japanese language version of XProtect Enterprise the two access clients will initially be in Japanese This initial look of the welcome page is automatically provided through the Download Manager s default configuration for more information see Default Configuration of Download Manager in the following This example shows the welcome page as it looks immediately after installation of an English language version of XProtect Enterprise LIE O te tow 0 03 Smart Client Installer Smart Client Installers 3 5b English Remote Client Remote Client 3 5 English oo girmen Se Welcome page from English language version of XProtect Enterprise by default provides access to English language versions of the Smart Client and Remote Client Download Manager s Default Configuration The Download Manager has a default configuration This ensures that your organization s users can access standard features without the surveillance v Remote Client sy
79. Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual enabling users to send evidence via e mail If you clear the check box the E Mail Report button will not be available in the Viewer s toolbar Use of the e mail feature is only possible when the Viewer is run on the surveillance system server itself not in a Viewer exported with video evidence Specifying Recipients You specify the e mail addresses to which e mail alerts should be sent in the Recipient s field If specifying more than one e mail address separate the e mail addresses with semicolons example aa aa aa bb bb bb cc cc cc Note If e mail alerts are enabled for the Viewer the content you specify in the Recipient s field will appear as the default value in the Viewer s dialog for sending evidence via e mail Users will be able to overwrite this default value Specifying Sender Settings Note SSL Secure Socket Layer is not supported if the sender belongs on a server that requires SSL the e mail alerts will not work properly Also you may be required to disable any e mail scanners that could prevent the application sending the e mail alert e Sender e mail address Type the e mail address you wish to appear as the sender of the e mail alert e Outgoing mail SMTP server name Type the name of the SMTP server which will be used for sending the e mail alerts e Server requires login Select check box if a user name and password is required to use the SMTP server e U
80. Er motion is detected as well as manually through output buttons t available in the Remote Client and Smart Client see page 175 Vaud ro D You access the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name Rene Sanam Seat Dui FU d window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 by clicking the Outputs button Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion Note Use of features in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window requires that output has been defined in the I O Setup window see page 86 You have a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs e You are able to select between all available outputs i e outputs defined as output events for the camera itself as well as outputs defined as output events for other devices on the XProtect Enterprise system e The same output may be used for manual control through an output button as well as for automatic triggering when motion is detected www milestonesys com Page 53 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Selecting Output for Manual Control You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually from a list in the Remote Client or Smart Client see page 175 To specify an output for manual triggering in the Remote Client Smart Client do the following 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the O
81. F1 key on your DX e keyboard whenever you are working with 57 How to Add an Input Based Event e the Administrator application or Image ea ME eden hous t et a Aro stein nho Wave m m Server Administrator Per pia Eum Ir Ve trag When you press F1 the help system will Om d open in a separate window allowing you to easily switch between help and XProtect Enterprise itself F tabsbatubabsbatute The help system is context sensitive ene i This means that when you press F1 for i MA Cid help while working in a particular window or with a particular task the help system automatically displays the help topic describing that window or task N Navigating the Built in Help System Even though the help system initially takes you to a topic describing the window you are working in you are always able to freely navigate between the help system s contents To do this simply use the help window s three tabs Contents Search and Glossary or use the links inside the help topics Contents Tab The Contents tab lets you navigate the help system based on a tree structure Many users will be familiar with this type of Type in the word s to search foc navigation from for example Windows Explorer VMD Contents Desch Glossary y gt Search Tab Select topic Found 10 Title Lo Rarik The Search tab lets you search for help topics containing particular be Ae a VD Evert Heb 2 terms of interest For example you can s
82. For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the timer event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on XProtect Enterprise www milestonesys com Page 117 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual How to Add a Manually Controlled Output Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered manually when viewing live video in the Remote Client see page 178 and Smart Client see page 175 In the Remote Client and Smart Client the output is triggered by selecting the required output from a list on the client s Live tab The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the specific camera from which a Remote Client Smart Client user views live video the output can be connected to any device on your XProtect Enterprise system To add an output for manual control do the following Note n the following it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output port on the required camera or other device but that it has not yet been defined on your XProtect Enterprise system If you have already defined the output on your system begin at step 5 1 In the Administrator window see page 30 click the O Setup button Milestone XProtect Administrator H Device Manager Servce Marage Rave AM Devo D P BR Dace Oce Con 010681 A KE Necegnan CF todo p Y dan poies Go
83. In order to be this event able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the occurs SMS settings window see page 82 www milestonesys com Page 92 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m e New Timer Window The New Timer window lets you specify the settings for timer events Timer Fan 28 events are separate events triggered by the input event VMD event generic AT event or event button under which they are defined Timer events occur a Orere specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are za defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined rU has been clicked D Seconds Mete Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only teen e A camera starts recording based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds e Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event i e when motion is detected a timer event stops the recording after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes You are able to access the New Timer window in three ways e If dealing with input and VMD events in the I O Setup window see page 86 When you click the plus sign next to a device in the windows Defined events list and select a defined event you are able to click the A
84. K This will add the user to the User administration window s list of users In the list s Type column the user will appear as a Basic User A Basic user is furthermore indicated by a blue dot next to the user icon Example 2 Wayne Massey Basic user How to Add a New Windows User or Group Note This method only works for users who will access the surveillance system through the Smart Client see page 175 or Remote Client see page 178 If your users will access the surveillance system with a PDA Client see page 179 add the users as Basic users instead You add a new Windows user or group by importing information about the user group from a local database on the surveillance system server or from Active Directory 1 In the User administration window click the Add Windows User button This will open the Select Users or Groups window GE Select Users or Groups JE Users Groups or Bulls secunty pencipals Object Types From thes loc By default you will be able to make Spee _ selections from your entire directory If you want to narrow this click the Select Users and Groups window s Locations button and select the location you require Erter the object mames to select fci 2 Inthe Enter the object names to select box type the required user or group names then use the Check Names feature to verify that the user and or group names you have entered are recognized by Active Directory Note
85. LKs How to I mport Device License Keys You must have a Device License Key DLK for every device IP network camera or IP video server installed on your XProtect Enterprise surveillance system Remember that you are allowed to install and use only the number of cameras listed on your organization s license sheet regardless of you number of available DLKs For example a fully used four port video encoder counts as four cameras even though the cameras are connected through a single device therefore a fully used four port video encoder will use four licenses System administrators obtain DLKs as part of the software registration process on the Milestone website www milestonesys com Upon registration DLKs are sent to system administrators via e mail You are able to specify each DLK manually when adding a device see page 36 through the Device Setup Wizard available by clicking the Add Device button in the Administrator window see page 30 However you can avoid having to specify each DLK manually by using the following procedure to import all received DLKs into XProtect Enterprise in one go Prerequisites The DLKs received in a dlk file must have been saved at a location accessible by the surveillance server for example on a network drive or on a USB stick 1 Open the Administrator window see page 30 2 Inthe Administrator window click the Import DLKs button Browse to the location at which you have saved the rece
86. Motion Detection The I O Setup window also lets you specify output e g a siren When defined events can be used for a variety of purposes For example an input event can be used for triggering output for starting a particular camera and for triggering that an e mail or SMS message is sent to a particular user notifying the user of the recorded event See also the description of the I O Control button below Opens the Event Buttons window see page 96 in which you are able to define events for use on event buttons Event buttons can be used in the Smart Client for manually triggering events Opens the Generic Events window see page 100 in which you are able to define events based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols Opens the I O Control window see page 105 where you are able to attach outputs to input events This way you can for example define that a siren should sound when a sensor detects that a door is opened Closes the Administrator application 3 Tip Clicking the icon in the left corner of the Administrator window s title bar gives you access to a small menu Selecting About Adm from the menu will display a dialog with your system s version number and software license code this is valuable information should you ever need to contact product support www milestonesys com Page 34 Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Device License Keys D
87. NET based solution O What is NET The Net software development platform allows the interconnection of computers and services for the exchange and combination of data and objects The platform makes extensive use of so called web services which provide the ability to use the web rather than single applications for various services This in turn provides the ability for centralized data storage as well as automated updating and synchronization of information The NET platform enhances software developers ability to create re usable and customizable modules which makes it possible to develop highly flexible software solutions You can therefore as a rule of thumb expect NET based software to be highly flexible ready for integration of new features plugins etc However organizations and their requirements are different and some organizations find that the high degree of interconnection of services and computers inherent in a NET based solution is not desirable Instead such organizations rely on more classic Windows solutions Differences between Remote Client and Smart Client The following table outlines the main differences between the two non PDA solutions i e the Remote Client and Smart Client The Two Access Clients Remote Client Smart Client at a Glance Remote User s None the client is accessed Client must be installed on Installation from server through a remote user s computer NET browser Framework is required on
88. Name Camera Name window 9 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return to the Administrator window 10 Close the Administrator The defined output will now be triggered automatically when motion is detected by the selected camera Note that the automatic output triggering will be controlled entirely by your motion detection settings for the camera in question See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window page 50 for more information www milestonesys com Page 124 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Archiving With the daily archiving feature in XProtect Enterprise you are able to keep recordings for as long as required limited only by the available hardware storage capacity You enable and configure archiving in the Archive setup window see page 130 The Archive setup window also lets you specify where archives should be stored for each camera Benefits of Archiving By default information received from cameras is stored by XProtect Enterprise in a database for each camera The database for each camera see Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window described on page 43 is capable of containing a maximum of 600 000 records or 40 GB before the oldest records in the database are overwritten With daily archiving the amount of records you are able to store is limited only by the available hardware storage capacit
89. Output Window cece cece eee eee III eren 94 Testing the Defined Output 94 Edit Output WindOWw ucro eee Ad ei aden 94 Testing the Defined Output 95 Advanced Wimdouw ee eem memes n s enne nnn 95 Port Numbers and Polling Freguency 95 Event Buttons ococcconncnnncnnncnancnancnancnancnancnancnnnananananananennnannnanananananananass 96 What Is an Event Button 96 Event Buttons Window cece cece eee eee Im eme eee eren enne 96 Defined Events List a ed le dx medi Eed ANEN ve dd 97 Specifying Event Buttons and Timer Events 97 www milestonesys com Page 8 Contents Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Specifying Global Event Buttons 97 Specifying Camera Specific Event Buttons 97 Specifying Timer Events 97 Editing Event Buttons and Timer Events 98 Associating Event Buttons with External Outputs sseseeeeeseserrsrreresss 98 Add New Event Window for Adding Event Buttons 98 Edit Event Window for Editing Event Buttons 99 Generic EVenNtS cocoonncocnoracnnracnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrnrnnrnrnnanrnnnrnnanrananennane 100 Generic Events Window ssssssssssssss Im meses e emnes 100 Add New Event Window for Specifying Generic Events 101 General Event Settings Gecton cece ceee eee eee e eee teeta eee ee 101 Event Rule String Section 102 Notification Settings Section 104 Edit Event Window for Editing Generic Events 104 Inp
90. P Professional 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows System Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Business 32 bit or CPU 64 bit Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Intel Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or higher Minimum 512 MB 1 GB recommended on Microsoft Windows Vista www milestonesys com Page 18 Requirements and Prerequisites Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended Graphics AAGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit colors Adapter Hard Disk Minimum 50 MB free Space Software DirectX 9 0 or newer Running as a 32 bit service application Important Port Numbers XProtect Enterprise uses particular ports when communicating with other computers cameras etc O What is a port A port is a logical endpoint for data traffic Networks use different ports for different types of data traffic Therefore it is sometimes but not always necessary to specify which port to use for particular data communication Most ports are used automatically based on the types of data included in the communication On TCP IP networks port numbers range from 0 to 65536 but only ports O to 1024 are reserved for particular purposes For example port 80 is used for HTTP traffic which is used when viewing web pages When using XProtect Enterprise make sure that the following ports are open for data traffic on your network
91. PTZ Scanning section lets you enable PTZ scanning and select a PTZ scanning speed Thteye Camera Confteuration Fisheye Camera c Configuration Window ECT Note Use of the fisheye technology requires a Se Bes qa dedicated fisheye camera or a special fisheye camera lens with a special fisheye license key specified in the Edit Device Settings window see page 38 SE Fisheye is a technology that allows viewing of AS 360 degree panoramic images through an www milestonesys com Page 62 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual advanced fisheye lens The Fisheye Camera Configuration window lets you configure the fisheye functionality of a camera You access the Fisheye Camera Configuration window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera name window see page 43 by selecting the Enable Fisheye check box and clicking the Fisheye Settings button Fisheye View Adjustment The camera s fisheye functionality is configured by adjusting its fisheye view field indicated by a green ellipse in the preview image so it encloses the actual image area of the fish eye lens You do this by specifying a number of values which will be used by the fisheye technology for converting the elliptic image into an ordinary rectangular image You are able to set the ellipse s X radius Y radius X center and Y center either by specifying the required values directly in the four fields or by u
92. Protect Enterprise such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output on page 84 In the following you will see how to define events based on input received from external input units such as sensors attached to doors windows etc connected to cameras or other devices on an XProtect Enterprise system To add an input based event do the following 1 In the Administrator window see page 30 click the I O Setup button Milestone XProtect Admisistrater E Servce Manage LES AM Devoe BL Deum os BE Necaptor pe TW VO Setup x This will open the I O Setup window see page 86 Dinon 2 In the I O Setup window first select the camera or other i device to which the input unit is connected then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window Adi rm oari dd reen A event Note Some cameras devices are capable of handling one input event only others are capable of handling several input events The content of the Add New Event RADE Ferd Mahon Cretan teary Ahel www milestonesys com Page 107 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual window varies accordingly For simplicity reasons the following steps will describe adding an event on a camera device capab
93. Running Out of Disk Space In case the XProtect Enterprise server is running out of disk space and the archiving drive is identical to the camera database drive XProtect Enterprise will automatically do the following in an attempt to free up disk space 1 First XProtect Enterprise will attempt to move archives moving archives is only possible if you use dynamic archiving with which you can archive to several different drives see page 134 This will happen if e there is less than 15 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 40 GB plus 2 GB per camera Or www milestonesys com Page 127 Archiving Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e the available disk space goes below 225 MB plus 30 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 525 MB 225 MB plus 30 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 15 disk space left 2 If moving archives is not possible XProtect Enterprise will attempt to delete the oldest archives This will happen if e there is less than 10 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 30 GB plus 1 5 GB per camera Or e the available disk space goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be
94. Select the check box to use a higher frame rate when an event occurs and until another event occurs then select required start and stop events in the Start and Stop lists The camera will increase its frame rate when the start event occurs and return to the original frame rate when the stop event occurs Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Speedup settings section Note Use of speedup on event requires that at least one event I O generic event or VMD event has been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output on page 84 e When to store images in the database Select when video received from the camera should be stored in the database www milestonesys com Page 44 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual o Always Always store all received video in the database o Never Never store any received video in the database Live video will be displayed but since no video is kept in the database users will not be able to browse video from the camera o Conditionally Store received video in the database when certain conditions are met When you select this option specify required conditions in the following fields On motion Available only when the option Conditionally is selected e when video received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions only Select the check box to store all video in which motion is detect
95. Service Bausino Resumling cece cece eee eee eee eee neers 70 Recording Server Service Starting Stopping cece eee e eee eee eee mm emen enne 68 Recording Video from Before Event Motion Occured cece cere eee eee e nae m meme 45 Recording Definition scien Meade ads ea reese ada 192 Recording How Use of Audio Aftects 0 cece cece eterna sene sese nene nnn 66 Recording Manually Started tet e er d TREE a 76 Redundante is 141 Registration of OWENT eie be te Pie iia 21 Relative Positioning PZA dea FUE ERE PRA 56 Remote Access Solution Choosing a 173 Remote Client PEE 178 www milestonesys com Page 202 Index Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Remote Client Private Groups oococcccncnccncnccncncnncncnccnnncrnnncnnnnnnrnr eese emis etie rie ese sn ns 149 Remote Client Server Side Installation of 154 Remote Client Shared Groups isc aci 149 Remote Live Request Start Cameras on 78 aCIDL E 186 Renaming Garneras ceiieses ceres tere xit iun A ci Ree LU ED vin aetna ce 31 erigat UITIUM 48 Resuming the Recording Server Service 70 Rising Sigrial 3x eir A Om e A RIA IER IR SR TRA aso 89 92 ROOt tiep MM 37 40 ng PI M did 37 139 Running Out of Disk Space Automatic Response if oocccccccccococcnnoncnnncnnnnnnnnonnnnn mne 127 SECANO M PA ER EET 62 Scheduling ais 71 78 Sensitivity uU 51 Sensitivity e CEET 51 Server Side Instal
96. Smart Client in log files and if set up through an e mail and or SMS alert Backing Up Archives Many organizations want to back up recordings from cameras using tape drives or similar Creating such backups based on the content of camera databases is not recommended it may cause sharing violations or other malfunctions Instead create such backups based on the content of archives If you have not specified separate archiving locations for separate cameras you could simply back up the default local archiving directory Archives When scheduling a backup make sure the backup job does not overlap with your specified archiving times www milestonesys com Page 128 Archiving Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Viewing Archived Recordings You view archived recordings in the Viewer see page 169 or Smart Client see page 175 This way you are able to use all of Viewer s or Smart Client s advanced features video browsing smart search evidence generation etc for archived recordings as well Archives Stored Locally or on Network Drives For archived recordings stored locally or on network drives you simply use the Viewer s or Smart Client s browsing features for example the timeline browser or the playback controls for finding and viewing the required recordings just like you would with recordings stored in a camera s regular database Exported Archives For exported archives e g archives stored on
97. Surveillance System Administrators Only see page 177 Download and Installation from Server Note Surveillance system administrators automatically get a Smart Client installed on the surveillance system server this happens as part of the surveillance system server installation Typically you download the Smart Client from the surveillance system server and then install it on your computer Alternatively your surveillance system administrator may ask you to install the Smart Client from a DVD see Installation from DVD on page 176 To download and install the Smart Client from the surveillance system server do the following 1 Verify that your computer meets the Smart Client s minimum system requirements see page 16 2 Openan Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the surveillance system server at the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator When you are connected to the surveillance system server you will see a welcome page 3 On the welcome page select your required language in the menu in the top right corner Then go to the welcome page s Smart Client Installers section and click the required Smart Client language version link A t Er n beten ast epteres s Smart Client Installers Smart Client Installers 3 5b Enalis Frenc cl Spans so TT Lu Example Selecti version Number o age language and required Smart Client li inguages may be different in your
98. Troublesbootimg 184 Removing the Entire Surveillance System enne 186 Removing Individual Components EEN ERER REENEN ENEE E nennen 186 Removing the Surveillance Server Software 186 Removing Video Device Drivers 187 Removing the Download Manager 187 Removing the Viewer 187 Removing the Smart Client 187 Removing the PDA Goftware mme nemen 187 PDA Server Removal Procedure eee 187 PDA Client Removal Procedure eme 188 Removing the Matrix Monitor Appltcation sssssssssrssseseerrersrrrrrrrerrnn 188 Removing Installation Files for End User Features ssssssssssssesrerrrerenn 189 www milestonesys com Page 13 Contents Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Introduction Product Overview With the purchase of XProtect Enterprise you have chosen an extremely powerful flexible and intelligent surveillance solution XProtect Enterprise provides a state of the art IP video surveillance system supporting the widest choice of network cameras and video encoders with the equipment connected to an office LAN or other TCP IP network such as the internet XProtect Enterprise is the perfect choice for large installations XProtect Enterprise handles an unlimited number of cameras up to 64 simultaneously used cameras per server multiple servers and multiple sites It is a top performance solution well suited to the sophisticated high end of the security market Several Target
99. When installation is completed click the Close button www milestonesys com Page 183 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Verifying the PDA Server Installation Before you begin installing and using the PDA Client it is highly recommended that you verify that the PDA Server is installed correctly First make sure that the XProtect Enterprise system s Recording Server service and Image Server service are running and that a user with access to relevant cameras has been set up in the Image Server Administrator e Tip You can use a Remote Client or Smart Client to verify that the Image Server s user setup works Then do the following l Double click the PDA Server desktop shortcut created during the PDA Server D installation This will open the PDA Server Administrator dialog 8 PDA Server Administrator image Server settings Hote ugeet Pa loge wes Ai PDA Server settings wd Tei enables r 8g P Sas Test wer interface for the PIA server e a 2 In the lower half of the PDA Server Administrator dialog verify that the Test enabled check box is selected then click the link below the check box to open the test interface in a browser emm 3 Log in to the test interface by typing the user name and m password as set up on the Image Server then click the gt ener Login button The test interface will now log in to the Image Server and list all cameras to
100. YLIGHT SAVING TIME rennen nnns LOS MATRIX MONITOR nennen ennemis 1 1 ACCESS CLIENTS 2 ER EEKEREREEER ERR RER EE ERR KER KEE EK renee 1 2 Access Client Overview bk ER ERR ERE RENE esee nne nnne nennen annuae nan 172 Providing Access through a Remote Client or Smart Client 173 Providing Access through a PDA Client 173 Deciding Which Access Client to US ooomccococnoroconcacnnracnnrncnnracanracannnos 173 Differences between Remote Client and Smart Client 174 Smart CliOMt coocccconnncocnonacnnracnnracnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrnrnnrnrnnrnrnnanennaneananennane 175 Installation Options esi cc 175 Download and Installation from Server ccceeeee cece eee eee ea eee eees 176 Installation from DVD 176 Silent Installation ccc ee eee enn nnn 177 Remote Client ocomccococcncncnoracnnracnnracnnracnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncananes 178 Accessing a Remote Client 178 www milestonesys com Page 12 Contents Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m PDA Client amp Server cocccocnococnnrocnnnacnnracnnrncnnrncanrncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncananes 179 PDA Server Installation amp Configuration Procedure sesseseeseseserererrsee 180 Installing IIS and NET Framework sss 180 Installing the PDA Server m mee 181 Verifying the PDA Server Installation eese 184 PDA Server Installation
101. a database must still be stored on a local drive i e a drive attached directly to the computer running the XProtect Enterprise system Archives for the selected camera will be stored in separate subdirectories under the Archives directory at the location you specify The subdirectories will be named according to the following structure Archives CameraMACAddress_VideoEncoderChannel DateAndTim Example With the default archiving folder located under C MyFiles MySurveillanceSystem recordings from an archiving taking place at 23 15 on 1st J une 2005 for a camera attached to channel 2 on a video server device with the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at the following destination www milestonesys com Page 133 Archiving Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual C MyFiles MySurveillanceSystem Archives 00408c51e181_2 2005 06 01 23 15 If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video encoder device with several channels the video encoder channel indication in the subdirectory named after the device s MAC address will always be 1 Example 00408c51e181 1 Dynamic Archiving Dynamic archiving is ideal if you wish to archive to several drives during the same archiving process but do not want to worry about how much space is used on each drive Dynamic archiving is only possible when you select the Automatic path selection Iv Automatic path selection check box When you select Automatic p
102. a CD you must use the Viewer Click the browse button in the Viewer s Database Information control panel to browse for the archive you want to view Once you have specified the required archive this way you can use all of the Viewer s browsing features for navigating the recordings in the archive See also the separate Milestone XProtect Viewer manual Virus Scanning and Archiving If allowed in your organization disable any virus scanning of camera databases and archiving locations For more information see Virus Scanning Information on page 162 New Database if Archiving Fails Under extremely rare circumstances archiving may fail For example a database may be full and ready for archiving but the operating system may lock content in the database if a content file is open This would prevent archiving In practice this situation would only occur if somebody attempted to view a database file e g a pic file directly from the database folder at the time of the archiving viewing the file directly would not work since database content cannot be viewed as individual files only through a Smart Client or Viewer In such situations the database will be put aside for archiving at a later point in time While the database is put aside a special temporary database is created for storage of new recordings This way no new recordings will be lost even though the original database is full provided enough disk space is available for storing the sp
103. a wide variety of sources can be used to generate events in XProtect Enterprise Events can in turn be used for automatically triggering actions in XProtect Enterprise such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions making video automatically appear on Matrix see page 135 recipients etc Events can also be used for activating output Output units can be attached to output ports on many devices allowing you to activate lights sirens etc from XProtect Enterprise Such external output can be activated automatically by events or manually from the Remote Client Smart Client Types of Events You specify which types of input should generate which types of events Basically four types of events exist e On many devices you are able to attach external input units to input ports on the device Events based on input from such external input units typically sensors attached to doors windows etc are called input events Some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion for detecting moving and or static objects etc typically configured in the devices own software in which case you are also able to use such detections from the device as input events e Input may also be received in the form of TCP or UDP data packages which can be analyzed and if matching specified criteria used to generate events Such events are cal
104. age 44M Dees PE Arte Lee impor DUC Evert Buona Tree Gora vert Conti This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 www milestonesys com Page 114 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 6 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Event Notifications button This will open the Setup Notifications on Events window see page 54 In the Setup Notifications on Events window s Available Events list expand the Generic item and select your generic even Then click the gt gt button to move the selected generic event to the Active Events list Setup Notifications on Events amp Setup Holohan for cama Noni ore on E venti Avadabhe vert 5 See OK Cancel Note Make sure that your generic event is the only event appearing in the Active Events list while you are performing the test otherwise you cannot be sure that it is your generic event which triggers the event notification Once you are done testing you can move any temporarily removed events back to the Active Events list Click OK in the Setup Notifications on Events window click OK in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 then click the Exit button in the Administrator window see page 30 Make sure XProtect Enterprise s Recording Server service is running Also make sure that
105. alled automatically during the initial installation of your XProtect Enterprise system However new versions of the video device drivers so called Device Packs are released and made available for free on the Milestone website from time to time We therefore recommend that you visit the Milestone website www milestonesys com look under Support gt Downloads and download the latest Device Pack Upgrading Smart Clients Smart Client users should now remove their old Smart Client versions and install the new one 1 On the required computers open Windows Add or Remove Programs dialog Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs dialog select the Milestone XProtect Smart Client entry and click the Remove button A wizard window will open Follow the wizard s steps and click Finish when ready 3 Now open a browser and connect to XProtect Enterprise at the following address http IP address or hostname of server l mage Server port number default is 80 Example http 123 123 123 123 80 4 From the welcome page that appears download and install the latest Smart Client version 5 If required download and install any Smart Client plugins needed www milestonesys com Page 27 Installation Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m e Using the Built in Help System Fs To use XProtect Enterprise s built in help system simply mr wm press the
106. ally C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance Image Server audit log files are named according to the structure is auditYYYMMDD log e g is audit20070615 log I mage I mport Service Log Files These files log activity regarding the Milestone Image Import service which is used for fetching pre alarm images and storing the fetched images in the database Pre alarm images is a feature available for selected cameras only it enables sending of images from immediately before an event took place from the camera to the surveillance system via e mail Image Import Service log files are by default placed in the folder containing the XProtect Enterprise software typically C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance Image Import Service log files are named according to the structure ImagelmportLog_YYYMMDD log e g magel mportLog20070615 log Export Log Files These files log activity regarding database export from the Viewer see page 169 A log file is created for each day on which export was performed www milestonesys com Page 158 Logging Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Export log files are by default exported databases as well as the export log file are placed in an Exported Images folder on the desktop of the computer on which the export was performed Note however that the export location may be changed as part of the export process Export log files are named according to the structur
107. ame of the camera for which the event button related to has been specified If the field displays Global the event button is a global event button available for all cameras Manual Lets you edit the name of the event button event name Note Event button names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp A ESA IA Send e mail Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event button is clicked In if this event order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been occurs set up in the E Mail setup window see page 80 Include Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected image from camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event button is clicked in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the event button is clicked In this event order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set occurs up in the SMS settings window see page 82 www milestonesys com Page 99 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Generic Events Generic Events Window XProtect Enterprise is able to analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and automatically trigger an event when specified criteria are met This way you are able to easily integrate your XProtect Enterprise surveillance sys
108. amera Name window see lee page 43 by clicking the Event Notifications button E en i Ge toscano KR What is an Event Indication Cx ze In the Remote Client Smart Client three different color indicators are available for each camera a yellow indicator a red indicator and a green indicator When event indication is used for a camera the yellow indicator will light up when the specified events have occurred Event indications can be valuable for camera operators as they will be able to quickly detect that an event has occurred even though their focus was perhaps on something else the moment the event occurred E Tip The other two indicators serve the following purposes The red indicator lights up when motion has been detected and the green indicator is used for indicating that video is received from a camera Specifying Events for which Event Indication Should Be Used To specify which events should trigger an event indication for the camera do the following for each required event 1 In the Available Events list select the required event o Tip You are not limited to events associated with a particular device You are able to select between all available events input events timer events event buttons from all cameras on the XProtect Enterprise surveillance system 2 Click the gt gt button to copy the selected event to the Active Events list When an event listed in the Active Events list occurs
109. ance video to fit the screen layout of the PDA Client The PDA Client is used for viewing live and recorded video from the XProtect Enterprise surveillance system on the PDA www milestonesys com Page 179 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual PDA Server Installation 8 Configuration Procedure Note The PDA Server does not support Windows authentication When using the Image Server Administrator see page 139 for defining users with access through the PDA Server PDA Client solution make sure you add the users with the authentication method basic authentication Before the PDA Server can be installed on a server Internet Information Services IIS and Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 version 2 0 50727 must be installed and configured on the server Installing IIS and NET Framework To Install IIS and NET Framework on the server do the following First IIS Installation Note The following procedure describes IIS installation on Windows XP If you are using Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2003 Server IIS and NET Framework are normally installed during the installation of the operating system 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel then Add or Remove Programs 2 In the left part of the Add or Remove Programs dialog click Add Remove Windows Components This will open the Windows Components Wizard 3 In the wizard s Components list select Internet Information Services IIS and cli
110. ance system server e Username Type your user name as specified by your system administrator The user name is case sensitive i e there is a difference between typing for example amanda and Amanda e Password Type your password as specified by your system administrator The password is case sensitive 4 Click the Login link PDA Client amp Server The following primarily covers installation and configuration of the PDA Server front end to the XProtect Enterprise system s Image Server For detailed information about using the PDA Client see the Milestone XProtect PDA Client User s Manual available on the XProtect Enterprise software DVD as well as from www milestonesys com The PDA Client and PDA Server applications enable remote access to the XProtect Enterprise surveillance system via a PDA Personal Digital Assistant a handheld computer device with a wireless connection Handheld remote access can be highly valuable in many situations For example first responders to break ins fires etc will be able to view live as well as recorded video of the incidents while on their way to the incidents wireless connection permitting The PDA Server is installed on an Internet Information Services IIS server and is used as a front end to the XProtect Enterprise system s Image Server The PDA Server handles login and session requests between the PDA Client and the Image Server The PDA Server also handles resizing of surveill
111. anensas 70 Pausing the Milestone Recording Server Service 70 Resuming the Milestone Recording Server Service 70 What to Do if the Milestone Recording Server Service is Stopped 70 Camera Alert Scheduler Windows KKK KEE KEE EE EE nnn 71 How to Set or Clear Periods in the Calendar 73 Colored ETC 74 How to Copy and Paste Gchedules 74 GENERAL SETTINGS eene nennen nnns annia eneen Z General Settings Window omccoonocoonnroncnrannnrannnrananrananrannnrananrananrananennas 76 Administrator Settings preces ixi eR ex d REN Ix A 76 Changing the Administrator baseword 76 Manual Start Recording Settings ssssssssssssss n 76 Milestone XProtect Central Settings sssssssssssss mmm 76 Patrolling Settings date EE SEENEN ein a eee a 77 Logfile Settings oooooccnccnccccconcnnoncnnconnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn nn nn memes sense entes 77 Event Recording Settings sssssssssssssssssssseme mmm mene 77 hos E 78 ursa E 79 Sms Settings externer di di 79 Change Password Window eeeeeeeeeeee nennen aeneae ununi nane 79 How to Change the Administrator baseword 79 Milestone XProtect Central Settings Window eese 79 www milestonesys com Page 7 Contents Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m E Mail Setup Window eee ENKE eer enne aana aan
112. ath selection 7 esaet ert ee EE you will be able to m 3 Ear specify archiving EhiPerting Area Comers 1 ro locations for all selected Ed rest 1 Camera t i pq West Entrance Camera 1 cameras in one go In the Select drives for dynamic archives section simply select the box next to each drive required as archives Note that it is only possible to select drives you cannot edit the paths An Archives directory will automatically be created in each drive and the archiving will take place the same way as described previously under Specifying that Archiving Should Apply for Specific Cameras If you need to use a path for archiving that is not in the list click the Add target button What Happens During Dynamic Archiving If the drive on which the camera stores its regular database is among the drives you have selected for dynamic archiving archiving for the camera in question will always take place to that drive first If the drive on which the camera stores its regular database is or becomes full or if it is simply not among the drives selected for dynamic archiving archiving will take place to the selected drive with the most free disk space Which drive that is may change during the archiving process and archiving may therefore happen to several drives during the same process However that has no impact on how you find and view archived recordings Note If you use a drive for both recording and archiving archiving t
113. be limited if cameras are not PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras or connected to a video encoder device The Camera Settings for Device Name window lets you specify certain information about a device s cameras This is primarily interesting for PTZ Camera Settings for Video Server ix P 1 Z Camera Selection Same ol the connected Caen se Pani T mm cameras cameras and cameras attached to a video encoder device You access the Camera Settings for Device Name window by clicking the Camera Settings button in the Edit device settings window see page ET yoe controled teou COMI P T Z ype controlled through COM Production Aren X Feed Cam Number Comes Type Deen Pot Pot ade Production Asea B XO Feed 38 The Camera Settings for Device Name window 515 cren E ed is divided into a P T Z Camera Selection section and a camera list Came Nae Cam Mumber Camera Tue Device Port Port Addesr Pyoduction Aes E xc hole Corea P T Z Camera Selection Section Field Description Some of the connected cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom cameras P T Z type controlled through COM1 www milestonesys com Select check box if any of the cameras attached to the video encoder device is a PTZ camera If the check box is not available PTZ is not supported for the device in question Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom cameras check box is selecte
114. ble to communicate with camera devices until you have installed the new version of the video device drivers It is therefore highly recommended that you perform the update of your XProtect Video Device Drivers at a time when you do not expect important incidents to take place Removing Old Version of Video Device Drivers To remove XProtect Video Device Drivers prior to installing a later version of the drivers use the following procedure on the XProtect Enterprise server s on which the XProtect Video Device Drivers are installed 1 Open Windows Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window select the Video Device Driver Vx x entry where x X indicates the relevant version number and click the Remove button 3 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the XProtect Video Device Drivers Click OK to remove the XProtect Video Device Drivers Installing New Version of Video Device Drivers To begin installation of the new XProtect Video Device Drivers version do the following 1 On the XProtect Enterprise server s on which you want to install the new XProtect Video Device Drivers version shut down any running Milestone software including any running Recording Server service see page 68 2 Double click the downloaded XProtect Video Device Driver file Devicel nstaller exe to begin installation Note Depending on your security se
115. bled As the automatic detection is based on an analysis of a number of images it may take a few seconds from you click the Auto button to noisy areas are detected and marked as areas in which motion detection should be disabled Note The automatic detection of noisy areas happens according to the noise sensitivity setting specified in the Adjust Motion Detection window see page 50 In order for the automatic detection of noisy areas to work as intended it is recommended that you specify a noise sensitivity setting that matches your requirements before you make use of the automatic detection feature Show Grid With the Show grid check box selected default the preview image contains a grid indicating the division of the preview image into selectable sections With the Show grid check box cleared the grid in the preview image is removed This may provide a less obscured view of the preview image Selection of areas in which motion detection should be disabled takes place the same way as when the grid is visible Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window In the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Messer OM Camera m you are able to associate a camera with particular external SE outputs defined in the I O Setup window see page 86 for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of lights g meser es esms meee gt gt 22 E The associated outputs can be triggered automatically when
116. button located to the right of the Available Events list www milestonesys com Page 59 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual This will copy the selected event to the window s rightmost list in which events associated with the selected preset position are listed When the selected event occurs or when the selected event button is clicked the PTZ camera will automatically move to the required preset position You are able to associate a preset position with more than one event Simply repeat the process for each required association To end the association between a particular preset position and a particular event simply select the required event in the window s rightmost list and click the lt lt button Setup PTZ Patrolling Window Available only when dealing with a PTZ d ud Pan Tilt Zoom camera the Setup PTZ Patrolling inue lee Som mm oe window lets you configure patrol schemes for PTZ steren sieta patrolling the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between several preset positions for the SSS camera To access the Setup PTZ Patrolling window click the Setup button in Patrolling section of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name za window see page 56 Note To use patrolling you must have specified at least two preset positions for the PTZ camera in question 6 Tip Although it is technically not patrolling specifying a patrol scheme with only
117. by detected motion or database related events e mail alerts generated by other types of events will still be sent out whenever the events occur Examples If specifying 5 a minimum of five minutes will pass between the sending of each motion or database related e mail alert per camera even if motion or database events are detected in between If specifying 0 e mail alerts will be sent each time motion or database events are detected potentially resulting in a very large number of e mail alerts being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore consider especially the motion detection sensitivity configured for each camera in the Adjust Motion Detection window see page 50 Testing Your E Mail Alert Configuration You are able to test your e mail alert configuration by clicking the Test button This will send a test e mail to the specified recipients If Include Image is selected the test e mail will have a test J PG image attached SMS Settings Window Note Use of the SMS mobile phone text message alert feature requires that an external Siemens TC 35 GSM modem has been attached to a serial port on the computer running the XProtect Enterprise software The SMS settings window lets you enable and configure the BEER x use of SMS alerts Such SMS alerts can automatically be sent j e to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific Enable SMS events see About Input Events Output on page 84 GSM modem con lo
118. c GD incidert Room Display occurs amp Moston on Men Osce Camera 1 L Connect gt Man Dice Camera 1 sending of live video based on predefined events it lets you define exactly which events and cameras to use You define this on a per Matrix recipient basis To define what should happen on which Matrix recipient when an event occurs do the following Cancel l Select the required Matrix recipient 2 Right click the Matrix recipient to select the required event TE Alum niri Destin Bad Door Last Wing 1 Back Door West Wing Motion on Back Door West Wing Camera b Executive Office Cam gt T In this example the selected event is detected motion on a particular camera Note that if available you are also able to select other types of event including input events generic events VMD events event buttons including global event buttons and timer events When you select an event it will initially be highlighted by a red exclamation mark ES Alam Certa Display 1 Motion on Back Door West Wing Camera t The exclamation mark indicates that there is additional configuration to be done 3 Now right click the event to select which action should take place when the event occurs Y Alam Cental Display 1 Motion on Back Door West Winal Camera b Delete Motion on Back Door West Wing Camera b Otsconnext then connect Deconnect You have three actions to choose from o Connect Connect to the camera
119. canenos 155 Virus Scanning scierie aana a A a aaa aiaa 156 Administrator Application Log Files e seen 157 Recording Server Service Log Files ooococoococnoroconcncnnracnnrncnnracanancnnrnos 157 Event Log Files ooococoococnococoncacnnracancncnnracanrncnnrncanrncnnrncnnrncnnrncanrncnnanes 157 Image Server Service Log Files eeeeseeeee eene 158 Image Server Audit Log Files eeeeseeeese eene nennen unn 158 Image Import Service Log Files eeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nnn nnn 158 Export Log Files oococoococnoroconcncnnracnnrncnnracanrncnnrncanrncnnrncanrncnnrnranancananes 158 Integrity Checks and Possible Error Messages se 159 VIDEO DEVICE DRIVERS susi aa LOO Updating Video Device DriVerS oomccoonoronnoronnnrannncannnrannnrananrananrananeanane 160 www milestonesys com Page 11 Contents Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual VIRUS SCANNING INFORMATION nn mms 162 PROTECTING DATABASES FROM CORRUPTION 163 USING 3 GB OPERATING SYSTEM VIRTUAL MEMORY 165 When Is 3 GB Switching Relevant esee eene nnns 165 What to DO c occcccococcncncnoracnnrncnnracnnrncnnrnrnnrncnnrncnnrnennrnrnnnncnnrnrnnancananeanans 165 If Running Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003 166 If Running Windows 2008 Server or Windows Vista 166 DA
120. ce Name window see page 40 may be limited if cameras are not PTZ cameras or connected to a video encoder device Serial number of device usually identical to the 12 character MAC address of the device example 0123456789AF 6 Tip XProtect Enterprise is able to automatically detect serial number as well as device type provided the IP address host name and password of the device have been specified in the P address DNS Host Name and Root Password fields Simply click the Detect Device button to auto detect device type and serial number A 16 character license key DLK for the device obtained when registering the software Enables the use of fisheye a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images Note Use of the fisheye technology requires either a dedicated fisheye camera or a regular camera equipped with a special fisheye camera lens for which a special fisheye license key is required If the device in question is for a dedicated fisheye camera the check box is selected by default and you do not have to enter an fisheye license key in the neighboring field License key for using the fisheye technology obtained when registering the software Note This information is only required if the Enable Fisheye check box is selected manually Network Settings for Video Device Section The Network Settings for Video Device section contains the following fields IP address IP address or DNS host name of the devic
121. certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Send e mail Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs In order to be if this event able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the occurs E Mail setup window see page 80 Include Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected image from Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is camera triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs In order to be this event able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the occurs SMS settings window see page 82 www milestonesys com Page 89 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Multiple Input Events Window The Multiple Input Events window is used for devices capable of handling several input events It lets you define which of the device s possible input events should be enabled and whether any alerts should be associated with enabled input events Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check Milestone s release notes to verify that
122. cess to all features and all available cameras select Full access for all users Restricted Access To use restricted access select Restrict user access Then click the User Access button to open the Define User Rights window see page 148 in which you define access rights for each user Master Slave Setup Section You are able to create a master slave setup of XProtect Enterprise servers A master slave setup will allow remote users to transparently connect to more than one server simultaneously When remote users connect to the master server they will instantly get access to the slave servers as well O How many master servers can I use in a master slave setup An unlimited number of servers per SLC Software License Code specified during installation can be designated as master servers If required for example if your organization is very large and spread over many geographical locations or in case you want to create a redundancy solution this allows you to use several master servers in a master slave setup 2 How many slave servers can I use in a master slave setup An unlimited number of servers can be defined as slave servers under a designated master server using the same Software License Code Note When using a master slave setup remote users and their rights must be defined in the Image Server Administrator window on the master server as well as on each of the slave servers Only cameras to which a remote user has be
123. ch features should be available in the various language versions of the welcome page First Installing New Features on Server If the Download Manager is open close it before installing new features on the server Installation files for Smart Client language versions language packs etc are by default available on your surveillance system server in a folder called Installers The Installers folder is located in the XProtect Enterprise installation folder typically at C Program Files Milestone Milestone SurveillanceM nstallers To install a feature from the Installers folder select the required language J C Program Files Miestone Milestone SurveillancelInstallers french sub folder then double click the Name required installation exe file In this Folder Tasks Y iss MlestoneXProtectRemoteChent exe example we are about to install a ee MiestonexProtectSmartClient fr FR e French Smart Client language pack on the surveillance system server aces Ss SmartClentLanguageP ack fr FR exe 6 Tip You can find more language versions of the Smart Client installer and additional language packs on the XProtect Enterprise software DVD as well as on www milestonesys com When a new feature has been installed on the surveillance system server you will see a confirmation dialog If required you can open the Download Manager from the dialog www milestonesys com Page 154 Download Manager Milestone XProtect Enterprise
124. cified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event the Start event list lets you select the required start event Note The use of event based online periods requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output on page 84 www milestonesys com Page 72 Scheduling Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m e Field Check Description Box Stop event When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer video to the XProtect Enterprise software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event the Stop event list lets you select the required stop event Note The use of event based online periods requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output on page 84 Patrol When you set a Patrolling period for a PTZ camera with patrolling the Patrol scheme scheme list lets you select the required patrol scheme Note The Patrol scheme list is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up Camera Alert Scheduler Window s Calendar Section The Camera Alert Scheduler window s calendar section lets you specify exact periods of time for each option for each camera selected in the
125. ck Next Windows Components Wizard Window Component 0 Can add oa as of Window XP To add or remove a component cick the checkbox A shaded box mesra that only part of the componer wal be metalied To see what s nckaded n a component click Detais Components v Bienes Explore 25 Management and Mortoang Tools 20 Mb S Marnie Queurg V VM Free Descaption includes Web and FTP support along wath support tor Faort Page bamactore Actwe Server Pages and databare correctores Total dek space sequred EL Space su ebable on deb 562585 Mt CJ Cin etai 4 Follow the wizard s instructions to complete the installation Then NET Framework Verification NET Framework version 2 0 must be installed on the server in order to be able to run the PDA Server Note that later versions of Net Framework may also be present on the server If NET Framework 2 0 as well as one or more later versions are present on the server Windows default settings may cause a later NET Framework version to be used instead of NET Framework 2 0 To verify change which NET Framework version is used do the following l Click Start and select Control Panel 2 Click Administrative Tools 3 Click Internet Information Services www milestonesys com Page 180 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 8 9 In the Internet Information Services window s left pane locate and right click the Default Web Site i
126. ck the O Setup button Device Manager Y 0522002 BR ecu Utica Can 110 10687 BR Mec m2 10 69 23 Y Gan 010087 This will open the I O Setup window see page 86 2 Inthe I O Setup window first select the device on which motion must be detected in order for the event to occur then click the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button This will automatically add a VMD event to the selected device unless the selected device is a video encoder see below o If the selected device is a video encoder several cameras may be attached to the device and a separate dialog will prompt you to select the required camera 3 In the I O Setup window see page 86 your newly defined VMD event will now be listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the device to see the listing Oeiras even er nnmn D Eae Oce Cam Recesi n D qp MO Evert Starr Camera e Video Server www milestonesys com Page 111 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Click OK to close the I O Setup window see page 86 and return to the Administrator window see page 30 For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the VMD event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on XProtect Enterprise o Tip For video encoder devices you are able to define a VMD event for each connected camera simpl
127. ck the Edit button in the System Startup section The boot ini file will launch in an editor Remove the 3GB from the end of the appropriate boot entry line under the operating systems section Save and close the file Click OK in the Startup and Recovery section A reboot is required after editing the boot ini file for the changes to take effect If Running Windows 2008 Server or Windows Vista IMPORTANT Improper modification of the operating system boot entry can render the operating system inoperable Milestone Systems do not assume any responsibility for changes you make to the operating system Adding the 3 GB Switch Select Start gt All Programs gt Accessories right click Command Prompt select Run as administrator then click Continue www milestonesys com Page 166 Using 3 GB Operating System Virtual Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Enter the following command to add the 3 GB switch to the current operating system boot entry BCDEDIT SET INCREASEUSERVA 3072 Where USERVA Specifies an alternate amount of user mode virtual address space for operating systems 3072 Specifies 3 GB 3072 MB A reboot is required after editing the boot configuration data store for the changes to take effect Removing the 3GB Switch Select Start gt All Programs gt Accessories right click Command Prompt select Run as administrator then click Continue Enter the
128. cking the Pause button or by stopping the service from the Recording Server Manager icon see page 68 IMPORTANT No video or audio will be recorded while the Milestone Recording Server service is paused or stopped see page 68 e Archive automatically when database is full Select this check box if you wish to automatically archive the database when it is full Note For this feature to work you should first enable archiving in the Archive Setup Window see page 130 e Delete archives older than n days 0 to use default archive setting In this field you can specify after how many days archives for the camera should be deleted Note What you specify here overwrites what you have specified in the Archive Setup Window see page 130 Type 0 to use same number of days as specified the Archive Setup window e Database path Specify which local directory the database for the camera should be kept in Default database path is the path at which the XProtect Enterprise software is installed typically C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance To browse for a folder click the browse button next to the Database path field Note Even though it is possible to specify a path to a network drive it is highly recommended that you specify a path to a local drive If using a path to a network drive it will not be possible to save to the database in cane the network drive should become unavailable www milestonesys com Page 47 Camera
129. criteria for each event for example a certain amount of detected motion or input from a specific sensor when the criteria are met the system interprets it as an event and automatically triggers the required actions However you may also want users to be able to manually force an event to occur For this purpose XProtect Enterprise lets you define event buttons Event buttons let users manually trigger events from the Smart Client In the Smart Client event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list See also 96 for examples of the many ways in which you can use event buttons To add an event button do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window see page 30 click the Event Buttons button Milestone XProtect Administrator y Device Manage Service Manage AM Dees Dared e Arche Sup impor Di VO Cortal This will open the Event Buttons window see page 96 2 Inthe Event Buttons window first select the camera or other device for which you want the event button to be available then click the Add new event button Note that you are also able to make the event button globally available i e available to users regardless of which camera device they have selected in the Smart Clients Add nome overt To make the event button globally available simply select Global at the top of the list instead of a particular camera device This will op
130. cted cameras Note This button is only available if the Automatic path selection check box is cleared Copies the selected path listing to all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section If you use the same archiving directory for all cameras this can save you having to manually specify identical paths for each camera Example You have specified the path C MyFiles MySurveillanceSystem for a camera To quickly use this path for all cameras select the path listing and click the Set all paths button Note This button is only available if the Automatic path selection check box is selected www milestonesys com Page 132 Archiving Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Field Button Description By clicking this button you can add a new archiving target When you click the button a path named New drive will appear in the list To specify a path simply click New drive to overwrite it The path you type must exist in the My Network Places folder Note that the path you type will not get a drive letter That is because it is not a mapped drive If it had been a mapped drive it would already have been in the list L1 Surveillance Note You cannot delete a target you have added Instead if you clear a check box for a target you have added manually and click OK the target will not be on the list the next time you access the Archive setup window However the Archiv
131. d If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COMI port on the video encoder device select the required PTZ camera Page 40 Device Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual C Description P T Z type controlled through COM2 type from the list If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM1 port select None Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom cameras check box is selected If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COM2 port on the video encoder device select the required PTZ camera type from the list If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM2 port select None Camera List and Fields The camera list contains a line for each camera channel on the device First line from the top corresponds to camera channel 1 second line from the top corresponds to camera channel 2 etc To change camera settings select the required camera channel from the list specify required information in the following fields and click the Apply button CA PEA Camera Name Cam Number Camera Type Name used to identify the selected camera Existing names such as the default camera names Camera 1 Camera 2 etc can be changed by overwriting the existing names Note Camera names must be unique for each device Users of the Smart Client can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such
132. d then click the Add new output event button WO Setup Dt ren LO tm tmd Add rome URDU event Add VM Ed Matar Cohen Aber m This will open the Add New Output window 94 3 In the Add New Output window the External output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields e Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 e Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information e External output name Specify a name for the output The name will appear on the list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp V In the example to the right we have specified that a Add New Output El siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port should sound for five seconds when triggered External output connected to Stars Det cormectod an Oupsi gt Kep output tor 7 1 20 scordi 6 Tip You are able to test the output by clicking the Secondi Te
133. d and accept the license agreement This will take you to the Image server setup step 19 Milestone PDAServer Image server setup Peace erte Hostname or P Address and port number Vor Protect mage server to use 3 In the Hostname IP Address field specify the IP address or host name of the XProtect Enterprise server to which the PDA Server should connect E Tip If installing the PDA Server on the same server as the surveillance system itself simply specify Localhost If the PDA Server should connect to a master slave system specify the IP address or host name of the master server In the Port field specify the port number used by the surveillance system s Image Server default is port 80 then click Next 4 An Important Note is displayed it is highly recommended that you read it When ready click Next This will take you to the Select Installation Address step 19 Milestone PDAServer Select Installation Address The metalo vell ratal Milestone POAS eren to the Feat virtual drechen To metal to thee virtual directory chck Mes To natal te a derer vius rechnen enter below Yisa deectoy PDAS ervey Por CH 5 Inthe Virtual directory field specify the virtual directory in which the PDA Server should be installed on the IIS default virtual directory is PDA Server In the Port field specify the port number you used during IIS configuration default port number is 8080 6 Click Next twice 7
134. d camera Check the Speedup box when you want to set or clear when the camera should always never speedup recording Note The Speedup check box is only available if you have enabled speedup in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 Check the E mail box when you want to set or clear periods with motion or database related e mail alerts for the selected camera Such alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion or database events are detected Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window see page 80 Check the SMS box when you want to set or clear periods with motion or database related SMS mobile phone text message alerts for the selected camera Such alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion or database events are detected Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window see page 82 Check the Patrolling box when you want to set or clear periods with patrolling for a selected PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera Note The Patrolling box is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer video to the XProtect Enterprise software continuously within the spe
135. d during specific periods of time For PTZ cameras with patrolling the automatic movement of a camera between several preset positions you are furthermore able to specify whether any specific patrol schemes should be used during specific periods of time www milestonesys com Page 22 Requirements and Prerequisites Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual You configure scheduling in the Administrator application s Camera Alert Scheduler window described in detail on page 71 Configure Archiving By default video received from cameras is stored by XProtect Enterprise in a database for each camera However the camera databases are each capable of containing a maximum of 40 GB or 600 000 records before the oldest records are deleted By using XProtect Enterprise s archiving feature you are able to overcome these limitations by automatically moving the contents of camera databases to specified archiving locations one or more times every day With archiving the amount of records you will be able to store will thus be limited only by your available hardware storage capacity By using archiving you will also be able to back up archived records on backup media of your choice using your preferred backup software Archiving is described in detail on page 125 Configure the Image Server The Image Server is the service handling Remote Client and Smart Client access to the XProtect Enterprise system Remote Clients
136. database a TA egen cath Jr cane of Gg ure take the lolo ior ru Quir y Page 43 Cae mihas ker hae Lee settings angri h serge ee rd gt Same m pedo Sak Caf sf exrochore sd ptem rere tratie Febere Dien detection settings Moten Cetecton Exduds Ragone Leg Database ters 000 ut dl mt e inttr fg ens Hs Med onm Ms ore Ser Fert Not fc aon Papar scan delete f Fais Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Speedup Settings The Speedup Settings section lets you specify the required number of frames to be used when motion is detected and or an event occurs in this field e Required framerate Specify required number of frames in the first field and select required unit per Second per Minute or per Hour from the list The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified in the Required framerate field in the Recording settings section which is described in the following E Tip When you specify a frame rate the interval between images is automatically calculated and displayed to the right of the frame rate fields Specifically for cameras using MPEG For MPEG cameras you can select predefined frame rates and it is not possible to select unit The number of seconds between each image is still calculated Recording Settings The Recording Settings section lets you specify the camera s recording settings in the following fields e Required f
137. dd new event button to access the New Timer window e f dealing with event buttons in the Event Buttons window see page 96 When selecting an already specified event button in the Defined Events list you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window e f dealing with TCP and or UDP based events in the Generic Events window see page 100 When selecting an already specified event in the Defined Events list you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window New Time Window s Fields Field Description Timer event is started by Timer event name Timer event occurs after Read only field displaying the name of the event or event button under which the timer event is defined Lets you specify a name for the timer event Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp V Some camera devices only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Lets you specify the amount of time that should pass between the event occurring event button being clicked and the timer event Specify the required amount of time in either seconds or minutes Example e The timer event should occur 15 seconds after the event under which it is defined has occurred e The timer event should occur 2 minutes after the event button under which it has been defined
138. de periods in which you expect to record important video Lets you add an archiving time to the Daily archiving times list You specify the required time by selecting the hour minute and second values respectively then clicking the field s up and down buttons to increase or decrease values 6 Tip You may also simply overwrite selected hour minute or second values Adds the archiving time specified in the Time to add field to the Daily archiving times list Removes a selected archiving time from the Daily archiving times list If the Archive Setup window s Enable Archiving check box is selected this section lists cameras for which archiving is possible The section lists all enabled cameras i e cameras which depending on their individual settings may transfer video to the surveillance system The section also lists the path to the archiving directory for each camera 6 Tip If a particular camera is not listed it is highly likely that the camera is disabled To check if a camera is disabled look for the camera in the Page 131 Archiving Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Field Button Set all Clear all Set all paths Add target Administrator window s see page 30 Device Manager section A disabled camera will be clearly indicated by an icon and can be enabled if you right click the camera name Specifying that Archiving Should Apply for Specific Cameras To specify that archiving
139. dividual users or groups defined locally on the server or users groups from Active Directory and authenticate them based on their Windows login This method does not work for PDA Client see page 179 users Using Active Directory requires that a server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller is available on your network What Is Active Directory Active Directory is a distributed directory service included with several Windows Server operating systems it identifies resources on a network in order for users or applications to access them Users and if required groups of users are specified centrally in Active Directory In short the benefits of importing user data from Active Directory are that Administrators do not have to create separate user accounts for accessing the surveillance system because user authentication will be handled centrally by Active Directory Administrators can import groups of users in one go if required Users can basically just use their Windows login when accessing the surveillance system no need to memorize separate user names and passwords Prerequisites The Image Server managing the remote access verifies Smart Client see page 175 users identities using NTLM challenge handshake with a Microsoft Domain Controller In order to be able to import users and groups through Active Directory a server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller must be available on your ne
140. dministrator s Manual have been set up in the E Mail setup window see page 80 Select check box if XProtect Enterprise should send an SMS mobile phone text message alert if archiving fails for example because the disk is full Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window see page 82 Lets you select locations for archiving for all cameras in one go This will divide the bottom of the window into two sections Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply and Select drives for dynamic archives See descriptions in the following Lists specified archiving times Archiving will take place every day at the specified times Archiving once a day will normally suffice However if you expect the daily database per camera to exceed 40 GB or 600 000 records you should specify additional archiving times To add an archiving time to the list specify the required time in the Time to add field then click the Add button There must be at least one hour between each archiving time To remove an archiving time from the list select the archiving time to remove from the list and click the Delete button Note While archiving takes place cameras for which archiving applies will briefly stop recording one after the other Although the pause is very brief typically less than a second it is therefore recommended that you specify archiving times that are outsi
141. ds after Door Closed occurs Note Pre post recording periods cannot be displayed in the timelines of the Smart Client s timeline browser The fact that these periods cannot be displayed in the timeline browser s timelines does not affect recording Live Settings The Live settings section lets you determine the frame rate with which users will view live video in their access clients Select either Same as recording or Same as speedup Note This section is not available for cameras using MPEG For MPEG viewing of live video will take place with the same frame rate as specified for speedup Audio In the Audio section you are able to associate a microphone and or speakers with the selected camera Note The ability to associate a microphone and or speakers with the selected camera requires that at least one microphone and or speaker has been attached to a device on the surveillance system www milestonesys com Page 45 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual When a microphone and or a speaker is associated with a camera audio from the source will automatically be used when video from the camera is viewed Note that you are able to select a microphone and or speakers attached to another device than the selected camera To associate a microphone and or speakers with the selected camera simply select the required microphone and or speakers from the Default microphone and Default speaker lis
142. e or can be made available to users The fifth level 5 refers to the language versions of the features which are or can be made available to users In the example only English versions are initially listed This is because the example is from an English version of XProtect Enterprise had you installed a Japanese version only Japanese versions would initially be listed In the example XProtect Enterprise has been installed an English language version If we expand one of the other languages in the tree structure s second level for example Arabic we will see that users who select the Arabic version of the welcome page will initially also only have access to English versions of the Smart Client and potentially the Remote Client The fact that only standard features are initially available and only in the same language version as the surveillance system itself helps reduce installation time and save space on the server There is simply no need to have a feature or language version available on the server if nobody is going to use it You can however easily make more features and or languages available as required See the following for more information Making New Features Available Making new features including new language versions available to your organization s users involves two procedures First you install the required features on the surveillance system server You then use the Download Manager to fine tune whi
143. e end is installed the Image Server also handles access for PDA Client users The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware it runs as e a service on the surveillance system server i e the computer running a e um the XProtect Enterprise software Surveillance system administrators em use the Image Server Administrator window to manage the Image Server s settings You access the I mage Server Administrator window from Windows Start menu Select e Start gt All Programs gt Milestone XProtect Enterprise gt Image Server Administrator Alternatively simply double click the Image Server Administrator desktop shortcut AN Each section of the Image Server Administrator window is described in the following Server Configuration Section The Server Configuration section is used for specifying server name and port for enabling optional external access to the server for optional definition of IP address ranges which should be recognized as being local and for specifying a maximum number of remote users allowed to connect simultaneously Field Button Name Lets you specify a name for the server By default the name is simply Server You can of course change the default name to a name of your choice Remote Client and Smart Client users with rights to configure their clients will see the name of the server when they create views on their client s Setup tab Port Lets you specify a port number to use for the serv
144. e Define local IP ranges window You may define as many local IP address ranges as required If required an IP address range may include only one IP address example 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 3 When ready click the Define local IP ranges window s Close button to return to the Image Server Administrator window ES Tip There is no feature for editing an already defined IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window However you can simply select the range in question in the Define local IP ranges window s list delete it by clicking the Delete button and then simply add a new range reflecting your requirements EE A Uist adpeiokitration y User Administration ic Ss Window E a E The Image Server Administrator s User ia Wee Abo eter pne administration window lets you define access client users You access the User administration Add tre User AM wren ner window by clicking the User Setup button in the Image Server Administrator window see page 139 You are able to add new users in two www milestonesys com Page 144 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual ways which may be combined e Basic user Lets you create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication for each individual user If the PDA Server see page 179 is installed this method works for PDA Client users e Windows user Lets you import in
145. e Displays the name of the speaker If required you are able to overwrite the existing speaker name with a new one e Enabled Lets you enable disable use of the speaker o Tip You can also enable disable an audio source in the Administrator window see page 30 Right click the required audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then select Disable or Enable from the menu that appears Note On some devices a speaker can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If a speaker on a device does not work after enabling it in the Administrator application you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to the speaker being disabled on the device itself www milestonesys com Page 67 Audio Source Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Recording Server Service Management Using the Recording Server Manager The Recording Server service is a vital part of the surveillance system video streams are only transferred to XProtect Enterprise while the Recording Server service is running The Recording Server Manager informs you about the state of the Recording Server service It also lets you manage the service A notification area a k a system tray icon indicates whether the Recording Server service is running or not Green indicates running default red indicates not running By right clicking the icon you ca
146. e Client straight from the XProtect Enterprise server Will you require a large amount of future flexibility from your remote access solution e Yes Use the Smart Client Due to the way the software has been developed the Smart Client offers a high degree of flexibility for integration of new features plugins etc e No Use the Remote Client Do you require a very feature rich client application e Yes Use the Smart Client The Smart Client offers considerably more features for remote users than the other solutions e No Use the Remote Client www milestonesys com Page 173 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Do you require a large amount of flexibility re remote users ability to export data e Yes Use the Smart Client The Smart Client offers the ability to individual user rights permitting export evidence in the AVI movie clip JPEG still image as well as XProtect Enterprise database formats e No Use the Remote Client The Remote Client offers the ability to individual user rights permitting export evidence in the AVI and JPEG formats Will you use a NET based client application e Yes Use the Smart Client The NET based Smart Client offers more features for remote users than the other solutions NET Framework 2 0 downloadable from http www microsoft com downloads is required on computers running the Smart Client e No Use the Remote Client The Remote Client is not a
147. e ExportYYYMMDD log e g Export20070615 log Note however that database exports may be encrypted and or compressed in which case export log files are also encrypted compressed and further file extensions such as mzi or men may appear in export log file names Integrity Checks and Possible Error Messages Log files are subjected to an integrity check once every 24 hours The result of the integrity check is automatically written to a file named according to the structure LogCheck_YYYYMMDD log e g LogCheck_20070615 log The log check file is by default placed in the folder containing the XProtect Enterprise software typically C Program Files Milestonel MilestoneSurveillance Any inconsistencies will be reported in the form of error messages written in the log check file The following table lists possible error messages other non error messages may also appear in the log check file Error Message Description Log integrity information was not found Log integrity can t be guaranteed The log file could not be checked for integrity Log information does not match integrity information Log integrity can t be guaranteed Log file name not found Log file name is empty Last line changed removed in log file name Encrypted data missing in log file name near line 4 Inconsistency found in log file name near line 4 Inconsistency found in log file name at beginning
148. e XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Device Setup Wizard El Please specty rfomation about the ip device The video device hai Prs IP adkbent on he nete ww 8 4 Une DNS host names Dick the Part Setup button d other than HTTP pat 80 and FTP pot 21 a used Pot Sep Note By default HTTP port 80 and FTP port 21 will be used for the device If the device you are adding uses other port numbers click the Port Setup button and specify required port numbers The need for specifying different ports may often apply if the device is located behind a NAT enabled router or a firewall When this is the case also remember to configure the router firewall so it maps the ports and IP address used by the device When ready click Next to go to the second step of the wizard 4 Ifa password is used for the device type the password for the device s administrator account called the admin or root account on some devices Leave the Autodetect Device option selected Then click Next OH Tip If you are in doubt about which administrator account to use for a device look in the Device Pack Release Notes available from the Downloads section of the Milestone website www milestonesys com 5 When the device has been detected type the Device Setup Wizard Device License Key DLK for the device in the e he oftware has found the foliceeng wiso device on the peched TPaddes DLK field Video Device Type MAC Adress S N 405 2199 2110
149. e able to configure event buttons to suit the exact needs of your organization Your main entry point for configuring event buttons is the Administrator window see page 30 Clicking the Administrator window s Event Buttons button will open the Event Buttons window see below in which you specify each individual event button Event buttons can be used for a wide variety of purposes for example As start and stop events for use in the Camera Alert Scheduler window see page 71 For example you can make a camera start or stop transferring video to the surveillance system when an event button is selected As start and stop events for use in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 For example you can make a camera use a higher frame rate when an event button is selected or you can use an event button for manually triggering PTZ preset positions on event see page 59 For triggering outputs Particular outputs can be associated with the clicking of an event button you do this in the I O Control window see page 105 For triggering event based e mail and or SMS alerts In combinations For example the clicking of an event button could make a camera start transferring video to the surveillance system while two outputs are triggered and an e mail alert is sent to relevant people Event buttons can be global available for all cameras or tied to a Keelen H particular camera only available when
150. e able to define that when a selected event occurs or when a particular event button is clicked one or more selected outputs will be triggered e i ed Dp ww nd id bad ind Note Use of features in the I O Control window requires e e that events and outputs have been specified see About pa Input Events amp Output on page 84 epa You access the I O Control window from the Administrator cu window see page 30 by clicking the I O Control button Associating Event with Particular Outputs When associating an event with one or more outputs you are able to select between all outputs defined on the XProtect Enterprise system you are not limited to selecting outputs defined on a particular device To associate a particular event with a particular output do the following 1 Select the required event in the Available Events list in the left side of the I O Control window o Tip Events as well as event buttons may be listed When you select an event or event button in the Available Events list you can view detailed information about the selected event or event button under Event Information in the lower part of the window 2 Select the required output in the list of available outputs the list in the middle of the window 3 Click the gt gt button located below the Selected Outputs list This will copy the selected output to the Selected Outputs list When the selected event occurs or when the selec
151. e column the following features all selected by default are available e Live Ability to view live video from the selected camera e PTZ Ability to use navigation features for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras A user group will only be able to use this right if having access to one or more PTZ cameras e PTZ Preset Positions Ability to use navigation features for moving a PTZ camera to particular preset positions A user group will only be able to use this right if having access to one or more PTZ cameras with defined preset positions e Outputs Ability to trigger outputs e g switching on lights sounding sirens or similar if such outputs are available e Events Ability to use the Smart Client Event feature for manually triggering events The Event feature is available in the Smart Client see page 175 only e Listen to microphone Ability to listen to live audio from the selected camera s microphone s available only if the selected camera has microphone s attached The Listen to microphone feature is available in the Smart Client only e Talk to speaker Ability to talk to the selected camera s speaker s available only if the selected camera has speaker s attached The Talk to speaker feature is available in the Smart Client only In the Browse column the following features all selected by default are available e Browse Ability to browse recorded video from the selected camera e AVI JPG Export Ability to gene
152. e in question Or DNS Host Note If Use DNS host name check box is selected the name of the IP Name address field changes to DNS Host Name in order to accommodate a DNS host name rather than an IP address www milestonesys com Page 39 Device Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Use DNS host name Default Http Port Default Ftp Port Root Password Description By selecting the check box you are able to use a DNS host name for identifying the device instead of using the device s IP address When check box is selected the IP address field changes its name to DNS Host Name ready to accommodate a DNS host name rather than an IP address When selected HTTP traffic to the device will go through the default port port 80 If you want to use another port for HTTP traffic to the device clear the check box and specify required port number in the field to the left of the check box When selected FTP traffic to the device will go through the default port port 21 If you want to use another port for FTP traffic to the device clear the check box and specify required port number in the field to the left of the check box Password required in order to log in to the device using the root account occasionally known as an admin or administrator account Camera Settings for Device Name Window Note The number of settings available in the Camera Settings for Device Name window may
153. e list below the check box Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window see page 82 When you have specified a new generic event click OK Edit Event Window for Editing Generic Events The Edit Event window for editing generic events lets you edit the settings for an event based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols You are able to edit the criteria according to which XProtect Enterprise should analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and whether any notifications should be triggered when the event occurs 6 Tip TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain special characters such as a etc within the text string to be analyzed www milestonesys com Page 104 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual You access the Edit Event window for specifying generic events from the Generic Events window see page 100 by selecting an event from the list then clicking the Edit selected button See the description of the Add New Event window for specifying generic events on page 101 for further information I nput Output Control I O Control Window In the I O Control window you are able associate particular oo pa events and event buttons with one or more particular Wi outputs This way you ar
154. e system runs out of disk space Prerequisites Shut down any existing Milestone software 1 Insert the XProtect Enterprise software DVD wait for a short while select required language then click the Milestone XProtect Enterprise installation link Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the downloaded installation file from the location you have saved it to 6 Tip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar When this is the case click the Run button 2 When the installation wizard starts click Next to continue 3 Read and accept the End User License Agreement then click Next 4 Ifan earlier XProtect Enterprise version 6 0a or later is present on the server you will be asked to accept that it is automatically removed during installation of the new version The automatic removal will not delete any existing recordings or configuration If asked we recommend answering Yes since this will ensure that old versions will not interfere with your new version XProtect Enterprise versions earlier than 6 0 must be removed manually before installing the new version see Upgrading from a Previous Version on page 25 5 Select Typical installation advanced users can select Custom installation and choose which features to install and where to install them 6 Select the Ins
155. e to reach all of the patrolling scheme s preset positions within the number of seconds you specify If not false motion is likely to be detected Bear in mind that it takes longer for the PTZ camera to move between positions that are located physically far apart e g from an extreme left position to an extreme right position than between positions that are located physically close together 3 The total number of seconds between each preset position will be listed below the two fields PTZ Patrolling Actions on Detected Motion You are able to combine a PTZ patrol scheme with motion detection so that when motion is detected the PTZ camera will pause its patrolling and remain at the position where motion was detected for a specified period of time 1 Select the Disable patrolling schedule if motion is detected check box 2 Select whether the PTZ camera should resume patrolling e When a certain number of seconds has passed since first detection of motion regardless whether further motion is detected Or e When a certain number of seconds has passed without further detection of motion 3 Specify the required number of seconds for selected option Example You may specify that the PTZ camera should go to the next preset position and resume patrolling when 10 seconds has passed without detection of motion PTZ Scanning PTZ scanning is supported on a few devices only If your device supports PTZ scanning the Setup of
156. e to specify timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the event under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred Edit Opens the Edit Event window for editing generic events see page 104 in selected which you are able to edit the settings for an existing event selected in the Defined events list Remove Lets you remove an existing event selected in the Defined events list selected Note The selected event will be removed without further warning www milestonesys com Page 100 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Add New Event Window for Specifying Generic Events The Add New Event window for specifying generic events lets you specify the settings for an event based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols You are able to specify the criteria according to which Y XProtect Enterprise should analyze received TCP and or UDP data fort Aare packages and whether any notifications should be triggered when the event occurs o Tip TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain Gite special characters such as a etc within the text string to be analyzed You access the Add New Event window for specifying generic events from the Generic Events window see page 100 by clicking the Add new event bu
157. e when it is transferring video to the XProtect Enterprise server for processing IMPORTANT The fact that a camera is online i e transferring video to the XProtect Enterprise server will not necessarily mean that video from the camera is recorded i e stored in the camera s database on the XProtect Enterprise server Storage settings for individual cameras are specified in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window see page 43 You are able to specify whether cameras should be online within specific periods of time or whether they should start and stop transferring video when specific events occur within specific periods of time You are also able to specify when the camera should speedup recording and if e mail alerts or SMS alerts should be triggered if motion is detected during specific periods of time If using PTZ cameras with patrolling you are furthermore able to specify if certain patrol schemes should be used during specific periods of time By default cameras added to Care alert Sehe dos y XProtect Enterprise will automatically ns smit paran rt St e EEN be online and you will only need to G Bere d n lo sena atid aroti sit en duis ec us ipie ears modify the Camera Alert Scheduler window s settings if you require nie ere A m e cameras to be online only at specific j Sege Mody ede a made rato susto times or events or if you want to use ow AAA specific alerts or PTZ patrol schemes tasr Note
158. ea in the middle of the window cameras are listed for each device with default names such as Camera 1 etc If you want to change the name of a camera click the plus sign next to the required device right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears E Tip Individual cameras listed in the Device Manager section are by default enabled meaning that video from the cameras is by default transferred to XProtect Enterprise provided that the cameras are marked as online in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window also default see page 71 If required you can disable a camera listed in the Device Manager section by right clicking the name of the camera in question See more information under Administrator window see page 30 7z m Edit Device Settings Window E The Edit device settings window lets you edit the settings of an eme already installed device Er wen Camere Srs To access the Edit device settings window see page 38 select the required device in the Administrator window s see page 30 Device MONDE m Manager section and click the Edit Device button The Edit device settings window is divided into two sections HS E f Ue DNE ost name Identify Video Device Section The Identify Video Device section contains the following fields Cc e buttons etc Netwsork Settings for Video Oevice Button Device Type Detect Device Device Name Select requi
159. eady click OK This will return you to the Event buttons window see page 96 4 Inthe Event Buttons window your newly defined event button is now listed you may have to click the expand icon H in front of the name of camera or other device to see the listing Levent Banten yl Dmm E dom amp w ves EI Kapgen Oce 3 ecepton pe Core D s Y 8 t Add rem eere Click OK to close the Event Buttons window and return to the Administrator window see page 30 The defined event button will now be available in the Smart Client see page 175 as described in the beginning of this text Note that individual users rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and or events in the Smart Client such rights are defined through the Image Server Administrator window see page 139 For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event button will now be selectable in line with other events defined on XProtect Enterprise How to Add a VMD Event Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in XProtect Enterprise such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output on page 84 In the following you will see how to define an event based on XProtect En
160. earch for the term zoom HowtoAddaTimerEven Heb 3 and every help topic containing the term zoom will be listed in the Vrai e aie Dd u search results Clicking a help topic title in the search results list Adri don Hi B will open the required topic PTZ Preset Positions for Help 7 Evert Window Ice PTZ P Help 8 Output Settings for Devic Help 3 The Search tab contains a number of advanced search features Evert Buttons Window Help 10 among these are the ability to quickly run previous searches the Csa ability to search topic titles only as well as the ability to display a Match ser ore search results ranked according to presumed relevance 7 Search ties oriy Glossary Tab What do abbreviations such as DLK PTZ or VMD stand for The Glossary tab in the help window s navigation pane provides a glossary of common surveillance and network related terms Simply select a term to view a corresponding definition in the small window below the list of terms www milestonesys com Page 28 Using the Built in Help System Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Links in Help Topics The actual content of each help topic is displayed in the right pane of the help window Help topic texts may contain various types of links notably so called expanding drop down links Clicking an expanding drop down link will display detailed information The detailed information will be displayed immediately below the link itself t
161. ecial temporary database XProtect Enterprise will wait for the next archiving occasion either scheduled or because the special temporary database also becomes full It will then archive the content of the special temporary database and thus free up space in it XProtect Enterprise will then continue to store new recordings in the special temporary database This will apply until the Recording Server service is restarted see page 68 Once the service has been restarted the content of the original database will be archived and new recordings will again be stored in the original database The special temporary database will also be archived and will then cease to exist O Can I view recordings from the special temporary database Normally the content of databases can be viewed through a Smart Client or Viewer regardless whether the databases have been archived or not However the content of the special temporary database cannot be viewed through a Smart Client until the content has been archived On the surveillance server itself you will be able to view the content of the special temporary database through the Viewer even if the special temporary database has not been archived yet Since the special temporary database will be used for storing new recordings until the Recording Server service is restarted even though the original database may no longer be locked you may www milestonesys com Page 129 Archiving Milestone XProtect Enter
162. ecific camera even without a defined VMD event or manually through the Smart Client see page 175 both are configured in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 106 Note Before you specify inputs and outputs for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check Milestone s release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Using the 1 O Setup Window s Defined Events List and Buttons The I O Setup window features a Defined events list in which input output and VMD Video Motion Detection events defined for each device are listed The window furthermore features a number of buttons for use when adding and configuring the events Add new Used for defining input events on the device selected in the Defined events event list Depending on the type of device you may be able to define one or more input events on the device Some devices do not support input output at all Refer to the release notes for device specific information Devices Capable of Handling One Input Event Only If the device is capable of handling one input event only the button will open the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event www milestonesys com Page 86 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Ente
163. eck box is selected image from camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs In order to be this event able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the occurs SMS settings window see page 82 www milestonesys com Page 91 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Edit Event Window for Editing Input Events The Edit Event window for editing input events lets you edit the settings for an existing input event on devices capable of handling one input event only You access the Edit Event window for editing input events by selecting the required device and clicking the Edit selected button in the 1 O Setup window see page 86 Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a single input event only Some devices are capable of handling several input events in which case a different window the Multiple Input Events window see page 90 will open when the Edit selected button is clicked Edit Event Window s Fields The Edit Event window for editing input events contains the following fields CA PESA External Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input event is sensor defined connected to Sens
164. eck boxes You may choose to remove database files if you wish but removing registry settings may mean that the new software version will not be able to utilize the existing configuration 4 Remove Video Device Driver Pack Vx x where x x refers to the version number Installing the New Version Once the old version of the software is removed you can run the installation file for the new software version Select the installation options that best fit your needs There are some recent software changes that you should be aware of e Itis now possible to install the software as a service and as of XProtect Enterprise 6 5 this is the only option since the Monitor application has been discontinued When the software runs as a service the Recording Server runs as a background process and any viewing either locally or remotely will be done through either a Smart Client see page 175 through a Remote Client see page 178 or through the PDA Client PDA Server solution see page 179 e The HTTP Server Realtime Feed Server very basic alternative to the Smart Client Remote Client can only be used when the software is installed as an application Since installing as an application is no longer possible in current XProtect Enterprise versions the HTTP Server and Realtime Feed Server have been discontinued Use the much superior Smart Client or Remote Client instead www milestonesys com Page 26 Installation Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5
165. ect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Configure Device Window coomccoonncoonoronnncannnrannnrnnnnrnnnnrannnrnnnnrananrananensas 50 Camera Settings Gechon e 50 Preview Mage iie center A nere era ed e se te sie Pe Ra prede Edd 50 Adjust Motion Detection Window eese enne enne nna nnn 50 Noise Toii 51 Motion SensitbIVIEy nici ihe eie co Dude Lus De n e eta e titu Fee Dn e e sve dd 51 Define Exclusion Regions Window ER ERER EE R EE R ER E RER ER ERR ER E KEREN 52 Defining Areas in which Motion Detection Should Be Disabled 52 Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window 53 Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion 53 Setup Notifications on Events Window eene nnne 54 What is an Event Indication ssssssssssssssss mmm 55 Specifying Events for which Event Indication Should Be Used 55 PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name Window 56 Why Use Preset Positions sssssssssssssssm mmm nen 56 Absolute and Relative Positioning PTZ Cameras rrer eere 56 How to Define a Preset Position 56 Event Window for PTZ Preset Positions on Events 59 Associating Preset Positions with Particular Events 59 Setup PTZ Patrolling Window a eER ENER ENER ERER REENEN ENEE KEREN EE R EE ann 60 Patrol SCMEM Ci ici 60 Selecting Preset Positions to Be Used for
166. ed On event Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when video received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions only Select the check box to store all video regardless of motion when an external event occurs and until another external event occurs then select required start and stop events in the Start and Stop lists Note Use of storage on event requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output on page 84 o Number of seconds pre post recordings on event Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when video received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions only You are able to store recordings from periods preceding and following detected motion and or specified events Using such a pre post buffer can be advantageous If for example you have defined that video should be stored when a door is opened being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may be important Specify the numbers of seconds for which you want to store video from before and after the storage conditions are met Example You have specified that video should be stored conditionally on event with a start event called Door Opened and a stop event called Door Closed With a pre post buffer of three seconds video will be stored from three seconds before Door Opened occurs to three secon
167. ed Matrix triggered live video can be viewed in Smart Clients or on computers with the Matrix Monitor application installed Matrix Monitor Client application for watching video triggered by the Matrix feature Matrix Recipient Computer on which Matrix triggered video can be viewed i e a computer with a Smart Client or the Matrix Monitor application installed Monitor An application used in previous versions of XProtect Enterprise for recording and displaying video The Monitor application has from XProtect Enterprise version 6 5 been superseded by the Milestone Recording Server Service MPEG A group of compression standards and file formats for digital video developed by the Moving Pictures Experts Group MPEG MPEG standards use so called lossy compression as they store only the changes between frames removing often considerable amounts of redundant information Keyframes stored at specified intervals record the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames record only pixels that change This helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG files NTLM Abbreviation of Windows NT LAN Manager a network authentification protocol P Patrolling The movement of a PTZ camera between two or more preset positions PDA Personal Digital Assistant a handheld computer device with networking features PDA Client Client application for remote viewing of surveillance video on a PDA PDA Server mage Server front end required when providin
168. ed Components in One XProtect Enterprise consists of a number of components each targeted at specific tasks and user types e The Administrator see page 30 The main application used by surveillance system administrators for configuring the XProtect Enterprise surveillance system server upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras or users to the system e The Recording Server see page 68 A vital part of the surveillance system video streams are only transferred to XProtect Enterprise while the recording server is running The recording server is automatically installed as a service the Milestone Recording Server service which will run in the background on the XProtect Enterprise surveillance system server You are able to manage the service through the Recording Server Manager e The Image Server see page 139 Handles access to the surveillance system for remote users logging in with the Remote Client or Smart Client see page 175 or PDA Client The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware it runs as a service on the surveillance system server Surveillance system administrators handle Image Server configuration including remote users access rights through the Image Server Administrator application e The Download Manager see page 152 Lets surveillance system administrators manage which XProtect Enterprise related features your organization s users will
169. edem ett KSE eens 128 Viewing Archived Recordings cccecceeeee eee eee eee ee me 129 Virus Scanning and Archiving ccceee cece eee eee ee eene 129 New Database if Archiving Fals 129 Archive Setup Window e eee esee eere enne nenne annnm annua n 130 Static ArCHIVING Em 133 Dynamic Archiving ccc cece eee emn esses emnes 134 Archiving AudiQ iielr rr bent Rr rrr pA er a3 ga ga tig py elu ex uidi EAE ua 134 MATRIX ADMINISTRATION rennen nnnm nnns LOD Matrix Configuration Window omcocoococnoroconcncnnracancncnnracanrncanracanancanines 135 Enabling Matrix and Defining Matrix Rechpnients ueeeeeecreeererree errn 135 Automatic Matrix Display on Events 137 IMAGE SERVER ADMINISTRATION nnnm 139 Image Server Administrator Window eese nnns 139 Server Configuration Section csssssssssssssse nm menn 139 User Administration Section 141 PS 141 Defining User Access Riobts mene 141 Full Access for All Users eiue RE de zx X ERI SEN NEE Ee 141 Restricted ACCESS ciu coire SEENEN rA Mawar AR 141 Master Slave Setup Section 141 Configuration on the Master Server ssssssssssssrirssssrrirrsnerrrrrererrrrn 142 Configuration on a Slave Server 142 If Not Using a Master Slave Setup 142 Upgrading Servers in an Existing Master Slave Setup 142 Log Files Gection III eee eee nnne 143 Audit Log Sect
170. ee page 134 or if moving is not possible deleted If no archives are present on the drive containing the camera s database the size of all camera databases on the drive will be reduced by deleting a percentage of their oldest recordings thus temporarily limiting the size of all databases www milestonesys com Page 48 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual When the recording server is restarted upon such database resizing the original database sizes will be used You should therefore make sure the drive size problem is solved or adjust camera database sizes to reflect the altered drive size e Tip Should the database resizing procedure take place you will be informed on screen in the Smart Client in log files and if set up through an e mail and or SMS alert E Tip For more information about how XProtect Enterprise responds to the threat of running out of disk space see page 127 Image Quality The Image Quality button opens the Configure Device window see page 50 in which you are able to configure resolution compression etc for the camera Event Notification The Event Notifications button opens the Setup Notifications on Events window see page 54 in which you are able to select events for triggering event indications for the camera when displayed in the Remote Client or Smart Client see page 175 Note The use of event notifications requires that at least one e
171. eld with the required value 5 Tip To allow an unlimited number of simultaneously connected access clients type O zero in the Max number of clients field Note A four minute session timeout period applies for access client sessions on the Image Server In many cases access client users may not notice this at all However the session timeout period will be very evident in some cases for example if you set the Max number of clients value to 1 When this is the case and the single allowed access client user logs out four minutes must pass before it will be possible to log in again www milestonesys com Page 140 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual User Administration Section Accounts and rights for access client users are configured in the Image Server Administrator window s User Administration section Access client users must be defined in this section in order to be able to log in to the surveillance system Defining Users To define access client users click the User Setup button This will open the User administration window see page 144 in which you define users Defining User Access Rights Once you have defined users you are able to define whether all users should have access to all features in their access clients including all available cameras or whether access should be restricted on an individual user basis Full Access for All Users To give all users ac
172. eli eM 105 7O DEVICE EEUU 85 96 LO Setup WIDOOW idcm eme rre a iv 86 arme EET 16 IIS PDA Server iran cpi ete cine te bs PR c d eeu tence EE FR DUK dae SO RO d t RR e 180 182 Image Import Service LOG vi iier ree e er EE dd 158 Image Quality ria opt itt 50 unr o 39 R TELE 139 Image Server Administrator Window mmm ee em enn en enn nnns 139 Mage Server LOG viii ai A A A a ENEE 143 158 Importing Device LICENSE Keys ii a a a 35 In Sequence TIMES PAN viu a o ia A ida 143 IDDIE entgegen adie teint EE use te Pansa ria rale Use eit Face es Ua Paw Ger dead Ee Fare d i 84 LAPUT EVENS ia Rm 84 86 88 90 91 Input Events HOw begleete tette di ti 107 Input O tputb Devices ree tl Heed da expe te yids die v a eende Ta UE De xav eerie 85 96 Installation Milestone XProtect Enterprise csse Ime enne 24 Integrity Check MOO EE 159 Internet Information Services ccc ennemis e enis esee rasis rra 16 IP Address ont sse LM LL Ei ed Lc e eie 36 39 IP Address Localia t eebe EI iia 151 IP Address Local eer Rada 139 144 LP Address PUBIC 2 m Leisten Deve ose vei tad kd reed Se e Desv ge ue dde usd e ida tenses 139 pem ir o a AA de A a e See Fisheye L Language PaCKS EE 152 Language packs Server Side Installation of 154 Language Support and XML Encoding Image Server occcoccocnccocnconcnnnncnnnnnnnnn eee eee rr 143 Live Settings ii EMT 45 live Tab CONE ssscdadeauitanaadtaitidaehatacien neta Mabe iaa 149
173. en given access will be visible to the user regardless of whether the cameras are connected to the master server or to one of the slave servers Note If they are to be accessed from the internet Enable Outside Access must be selected on all involved servers and ports must be mapped accordingly in the routers and or firewalls used Note If upgrading the XProtect Enterprise servers involved in a master slave setup to XProtect Enterprise 6 0 or later from a previous XProtect Enterprise version a certain procedure is recommended Read Upgrading Servers in an Existing Master Slave Setup on page 142 for more information www milestonesys com Page 141 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Configuration on the Master Server If the server you are configuring should be a master server do the following 1 Select the Designate as Master Server check box 2 Next define which other XProtect Enterprise servers should act as slave servers To define other servers as slave servers click the Slaves button Desgnate as Master Server um sn AM Pre 6 0 Version Slaves This will open the Slave Administration window see page 151 in which you are able to define all required slave servers Configuration on a Slave Server Apart from the notes listed above no special master slave configuration is required on a slave server simply do not specify anything in the Master Slave Setup section
174. en the Add New Event window for adding event buttons see page 98 3 In the Add New Event window for adding event buttons mm ix the Button related to field will show the name of the E EN selected camera or other device If you are adding a PA globally available event button the field will display Global Now specify information in the following fields andern E e Manual event name Specify a name for the event 55 soma button Note that event names must not contain the SE following characters lt gt amp E e Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E www milestonesys com Page 109 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Mail setup window see page 80 If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box e Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window see page 82 When r
175. enabled you are able to specify the following values e Days to log Number of days in which audit log files should be kept before they are overwritten Default is 30 days If you specify O zero audit log files will be kept indefinitely disk storage space permitting e Minimum Logging Interval Minimum number of seconds between logged events Specifying a high number of seconds between logged events may help reduce the size of the audit log Default is 60 seconds e n Sequence Timespan Maximum number of seconds to pass for viewed images to be considered to be within the same sequence Specifying a high number of seconds may thus help limit the number of viewed sequences logged and reduce the size of the audit log Default is ten seconds Language Support and XML Encoding Section In the Language Support and XML Encoding section select the language character set used by the XProtect Enterprise server and access clients Example If the XProtect Enterprise server runs a Japanese version of Windows select Japanese Provided access clients also use a Japanese version of Windows this will ensure that the right language and character encoding is used in clients communication with the server If using a master slave setup remember to specify the same language character set on all involved servers www milestonesys com Page 143 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Good to Know Cli
176. ent Access to Stopped Cameras Access client users are able to view live video from cameras even though the cameras in question are not online online means that the camera delivers a video stream to the surveillance system server as defined in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window see page 71 This however requires that a particular setting in the Administrator application is enabled To enable the required setting open the Administrator application and do the following 1 In the Administrator window see page 30 click the General Settings button This will open the General Settings window see page 76 2 Inthe General Settings window s Advanced section select Start cameras on remote live requests 3 Click OK Define Local IP Ranges Window ie tete snes x The Image Server Administrator s Define local IP ranges Add Osee window lets you define IP address ranges which the Image TT n Server should recognize as coming from a local network You access the Define local IP ranges window by clicking the Local IP Ranges button in the Image Server Administrator window see page 139 To define a local IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window do the following 1 Specify the beginning of the IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window s first field and the end of the IP address range in the second field 2 Click the Add button The IP address range will be added to the list in the lower part of th
177. ents amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Event priority Description triggered if the received package contains the terms User001 and Door053 and Sunday as your required terms are contained in the received package The same data package may be analyzed for different events The ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which event should be triggered if a received package matches the criteria for several events The priority must be specified as a number between O lowest priority and 1000 highest priority When XProtect Enterprise receives a TCP and or UDP package analysis of the packet will start with analysis for the event with the highest priority This way when a package matches the criteria for several events only the event with the highest priority will be triggered In case a package matches the criteria for several events with an identical priority e g two events with a priority of 999 all events with the priority in question will be triggered Event Rule String Section Field Button Description Event substring Event message include Lets you specify the individual items for which XProtect Enterprise should look out when analyzing data packages Specify one or more terms then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis Examples
178. er The default port number is 80 You are able to change the default port number Enable Select the check box if the server should be accessible from the internet via a Outside router or firewall If selecting this option also specify the outside public IP Access address and port number in the Outside IP Address and Outside Port fields Note When using outside access the router or firewall used must be configured so requests sent to the outside public IP address and port are forwarded to the inside local IP address and port of the server running the Image Server service www milestonesys com Page 139 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Outside Address Outside Port Local IP Ranges Max number of clients Lets you specify a public IP address or host name for use when the server should be available from the internet Lets you specify a port number for use when the server should be available from the internet The default port number is 80 You are able to change the default port number Opens the Define local IP ranges window see page 144 in which you are able to define IP address ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network Background When a Remote Client or Smart Client connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact IP addresses goes on in the background completel
179. era only Specifying Global Event Buttons To specify a global event button select the Global entry at the top of the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons see page 98 in which you specify a name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e mail or SMS alerts when clicked When you click OK in the Add New Event window for adding event buttons you are returned to the Event Buttons window in which your new event button will appear in the Defined Events list Specifying Camera Specific Event Buttons To specify an event button for a specific camera select the required camera in the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons see page 98 in which you specify a name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e mail or SMS alerts when clicked When you click OK in the Add New Event window for adding event buttons you are returned to the Events window for specifying event buttons in which your new event button will appear in the Defined Events list Specifying Timer Events When you have specified an event button you are able to associate timer events with the event button Timer events are separate events occurring a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event button has been clicked Time
180. eras are separate units which may have separate timing devices power supplies etc camera time and XProtect Enterprise system time may not correspond fully and this may occasionally lead to confusion As all images are time stamped by XProtect Enterprise upon reception and exact date and time information for each image is thus already known it is recommended that you keep the Include Date and Time in Image check box cleared Should you want to use the Include Date and Time in Image feature it is recommended that you click the Synchronize Time button if available Clicking the Synchronize Time button will set camera time to system time but does not guarantee that camera time will match system time indefinitely EE Tip For consistent synchronization you may if supported by the camera auto synchronize camera and system time via a time server Preview Image When adjusting camera settings you are able to view the effect of your settings by clicking the Preview Image button located at the bottom of the window Clicking the Preview Image button will provide you with an image from the camera in question as it would look with the settings specified in the Camera Settings section When you have found the best possible camera settings click OK to apply the settings for the camera A4 pest Sege Dote thew yl Adjust Motion Detection Window The Adjust Motion Detection window lets you specify motion detection sensitivity for a specific camera
181. eras is configured in the Setup PTZ Patrolling window see page 60 Logfile Settings The Logfile Settings section lets you specify where to keep the general log files containing information about activity in the Administrator and the Recording Server see page 68 and for how long Separate log files are generated for the Administrator and Recording Server service Logfile Path By default the Administrator and Recording Server log files are stored in the folder containing the XProtect Enterprise software typically C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Logfile Path field or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder Days to Log A new log file is created every day A log file older than the number of days specified in the Days to log field is automatically deleted By default the log file will be stored for five days To specify another number of days simply overwrite the value in the Days to log field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of 0 in the Days to log field The maximum number of days to log is 9999 6 Tip Read more about logging on page 157 Event Recording Settings As opposed to the general log files which contain information about activity on the surveillance system itself event log files contain information about registered events for more information
182. erequisites Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual even though the cameras are connected through a single device therefore a fully used four port video server will use four licenses e Click Submit The device is added to a list of devices under your SLC e f more devices are required click the Add New MAC link and repeat the process e When ready click the Get DLKs by e mail link to have DLKs for all the devices registered under your SLC e mailed to you O Install XProtect Enterprise see Installation on page 24 Import Device License Keys see How to Import Device License Keys DLKs on page 35 Add IP Devices see How to Add a device on page 36 In XProtect Enterprise you do not have to worry about having to add individual cameras to the system This is because cameras area connected to IP devices so once you have added the required devices to your XProtect Enterprise system all cameras connected to the devices are connected to the system as well LJ Configure Cameras on XProtect Enterprise You are able to specify a wide variety of settings for each camera connected to the XProtect Enterprise system Your entry point for configuring cameras is the Administrator window the main window in XProtect Enterprise s Administrator application See page 30 To configure a camera first select the required device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the plus sign next to the
183. es folder at the target destination will remain available for viewing recordings 6 Tip Milestone s Storage Calculator found in the support section of the Milestone website www milestonesys com can help you easily determine the storage capacity required for your surveillance system Static Archiving Specifying archiving locations for individual cameras is only possible when the Automatic path selection check box is not selected Automatic path selection If the Automatic path selection check box is not selected a default archiving location typically c program files milestone milestone surveillance is specified for each camera The default archiving directory called Archives will be located at this location To specify another location for the archiving directory for a camera either click the browse icon C3 next to the path listing for the required camera and browse to the required location or click the default path listing to overwrite it c program files mysurveillancesystem Ove ting an existing pat o Tip To maximize load sharing and optimize performance distribute archives across your available storage space if possible Note If specifying another archiving location than the default location typically c program files milestonel milestone surveillance the location you specify must exist You are not able to create new directories as part of the process If archiving to a network drive the regular camer
184. ettings with those recommended in the cameras manuals Using DVR Devices You can easily use DVR Digital Video Recorder devices with XProtect Enterprise You add DVR devices just like any other devices In the Administrator window see page 30 DVR devices will be listed in the same way as video encoders Access client users will experience no difference when viewing live video from a camera attached to at DVR compared to video from any other camera However when users view recordings from a DVR device the recordings will be viewed from the hard disk of the DVR rather than from a camera database on the XProtect Enterprise server Note The use of PTZ cameras is not supported for DVR devices www milestonesys com Page 42 Device Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Camera Administration Adding and Configuring Cameras In XProtect Enterprise you do not have to worry about having to add individual cameras to the system Cameras are connected to devices so once you have added the required devices to your XProtect Enterprise system see How to Add a Device on page 36 all cameras connected to the devices are connected to the system as well You are able to specify a wide variety of settings for each camera connected to the XProtect Enterprise system Your entry point for such camera configuration is the Administrator window see page 30 To configure a camera select the required camera in
185. ewise each time you click the down button the selected output is moved down one step To remove an output from the On Manual Control list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection You are able to select outputs to be triggered automatically when motion is detected in video from the camera This feature does not require that a VMD Video Motion Detection event has been defined for the camera in the I O Setup window see page 86 www milestonesys com Page 106 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6 Tip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list How to How to Add an Input Based Event Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in X
186. g remote access to users logging in with a PDA Client PIN Personal Identity Number or Personal Identification Number a number used to identify and authenticate users Polling Regularly checking the state of something for example whether input has been received on a particular input port of a device The defined interval between such state checks is often called a polling frequency PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom a highly movable and flexible type of camera PUK Personal Unblocking Key or PIN Unlock Key a number used as an extra security measure for SIM cards R Recording In IP video surveillance systems the term recording means saving video and if applicable audio from a camera in the camera s database on the surveillance system In many IP surveillance systems all of the video audio received from cameras is not necessarily saved Saving of video and audio in a camera s database is in many cases started only when there is a reason to do so for example when motion is detected when an event occurs or when a specific period of www milestonesys com Page 192 Glossary Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual time begins Recording is then stopped after a specified amount of time when motion is no longer detected when an event occurs when a time period ends or similar The term recording originates from the analog world where video audio was not taped until the record button was pressed Recording Server Service
187. g the surveillance system databases is not closed properly and databases will become corrupt In case of a crash Windows will normally restart the Recording Server service However when the Recording Server service is restarted one of its first tasks will be to repair the databases The database repair process can in some cases take several hours depending on the amount of data in the corrupted databases If you experience such problems and you run XProtect Enterprise 6 5d or newer making Windows use 3 GB for running processes is likely to solve the problems If you have not experienced such problems but you run XProtect Enterprise 6 5d or newer and your XProtect Enterprise installation is very large and or features many megapixel cameras 3 GB switching is likely to help prevent the problems from occurring What to Do The way to configure 32 bit Windows to be LARGEADDRESSAWARE depends on your type of Windows operating system In the following you will see to methods outlining Microsoft s recommended procedure for increasing the per process memory limit to 3 GB Use the first method www milestonesys com Page 165 Using 3 GB Operating System Virtual Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual if running Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003 Use the second method if running Windows 2008 Server Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Enterprise or Windows Vista Ultimate If Running Windows XP Professional or
188. ghts If you only have standard user rights you will not be able to configure the software or stop and start the Recording Server service However you are still able to view live and recorded video via the Smart Client www milestonesys com Page 19 Requirements and Prerequisites Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual These restrictions are a part of the User Account Control a security component in Windows Vista Note however that it is possible to disable the User Account Control For more information visit www microsoft com and search for Vista User Account Control or similar Time Server Recommended All images are time stamped by XProtect Enterprise upon reception but since cameras are separate units which may have separate timing devices power supplies etc camera time and XProtect Enterprise system time may not correspond fully and this may occasionally lead to confusion If supported by your cameras we thus recommend you auto synchronize camera and system time through a time server for consistent synchronization For information about configuring a time server searching www microsoft com for time server time service or similar www milestonesys com Page 20 Requirements and Prerequisites Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Administrators Getting Started Checklist This chapter outlines the tasks typically involved in setting up a working XProtect Enterprise system T
189. has been clicked www milestonesys com Page 93 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Add New Output Window The Add New Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device You access the Add New Output window by selecting the required device and clicking the Add new output event button in the I O Setup window see page 86 If the device does not support output the button will not be available Note Before you specify output for a device verify that the output is supported by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in 144 tira Out peat HS laens nds corwected e Zeng Door pd carved on Km pul ee VM secondi Ld their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the XProtect Enterprise release note to verify that output is supported for the device and firmware used Add New Output Window s Fields External Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the output event output is defined connected to Output Lets you select which of the device s output ports the output is connected to connected Many cameras only have a single output port in that case simply select on Output 1 Keep output for External output name Lets you specify the amount of time for which the output should be applied Specify the required amount of time in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Example The output should be kept for five ten
190. he Download Manager see page 152 You can remove installation files for non required features from the surveillance system server This can help you save disk space on the server if you know that your organization is not going to use certain features for example non relevant language versions 1 Open the Installers folder located in the XProtect Enterprise installation folder typically at C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance nstallers 2 Select the required language sub folder then delete the unwanted installation exe files In the following example we are about to delete a French Smart Client language pack installation file from the surveillance system server J C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillamce Installers french Name Folder Tasks Y CT ss_MilestonexProtectRemoteClient exe H SS MilestonexProtectSmartClient fr FR exe laces Y SS SmartClentLanguagePack fr FR exer www milestonesys com Page 189 Removal Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Glossary A Administrator 1 System administrator 2 The main application used by surveillance system administrators for configuring the surveillance system server upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras or users to the system API Application Program Interface a set of tools and building blocks for creating or customizing software applications Aspect Ratio
191. he Milestone XProtect Central server itself Default password is Pass e Port Type the port number to which the Milestone XProtect Central server should connect when accessing the XProtect Enterprise server The port number must match the port number specified on the Milestone XProtect Central server itself Default port is 1237 e IP When the Milestone XProtect Central server retrieves alarms from the XProtect Enterprise server the XProtect Enterprise server includes information about its IP address in the alarm information If the Milestone XProtect Central server accesses the XProtect Enterprise server over the internet or if the XProtect Enterprise server has two or more network adapters you must specify the IP address to which the Milestone XProtect Central server should connect If you do not specify an IP address the IP address of the first network adaptor found the XProtect Enterprise server will be used E Mail Setup Window The E Mail setup window lets you enable and configure the use of e mail alerts Such e mail alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events see About Input Events Output on page 84 occur By default SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used when sending e mail alerts Compared with other mail transfer methods SMTP has the advantage that you will avoid automatically triggered warnings from your e mail client when an e mail alert is to be sent S
192. he content on the page simply expands Expanding drop down links thus help save space e Tip If you wish to quickly collapse all texts from expanding drop down links in a help topic simply click the title of the topic on the help system s Contents tab Printing Help Topics To print a help topic navigate to the required topic and click the help window s Print button Print When you click the Print button a dialog box may ask you whether you wish to print the selected topic only or all topics under the selected heading When this is the case select Print the selected topic and click OK When printing a selected help topic the topic will be printed as you see it on your screen Therefore if a topic contains expanding drop down links see Links in Help Topics in the previous click each required drop down link to display the text in order for it to be included in your printout This allows you to create targeted printouts containing exactly the amount of information you require www milestonesys com Page 29 Using the Built in Help System Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m e The Administrator Application Administrator Login Window em For users without administrator rights access to certain features in Plon murio nikk pod XProtect Enterprise may in some organizations have been restricted When this is the case you will be asked to specify the administrator password in the Administrator Login
193. he information in this chapter is primarily aimed at system administrators Note that although information in this chapter is presented as a checklist a completed checklist does not in itself guarantee that the XProtect Enterprise system will match the exact needs of your organization To make the system match the needs of your organization it is highly recommended that you monitor and adjust the system once it is running For example it is often a very good idea to spend time on testing and adjusting the motion detection sensitivity settings for individual cameras under different physical conditions day night windy calm etc once the system is running The setup of events and associated actions see About Input Events amp Output on page 84 is another example of configuration which depends entirely on your organization s needs V vou may check the boxes in this checklist as you go along O Verify Initial Configuration of Devices Make sure the devices IP network cameras or IP video encoders you are going to use are configured with IP addresses passwords etc as specified by the manufacturer Such initial configuration is required in order to be able to connect the devices to the network and the XProtect Enterprise solution Register software and obtain Device License Keys You must have a Device License Key DLK for each device IP network camera or IP video server to be used with the XProtect Enterprise solution Yo
194. he menu that appears eat s The Camera Name and Number window contains two fields www milestonesys com Page 64 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Camera Name Camera Number Displays the name of the camera If required you are able to overwrite the existing camera name with a new one Users of the Smart Client see page 175 can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Camera shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera must not contain any letters or special characters and must be no longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers A 3 1234567809 Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in the Smart Client see page 175 In other applications such as the Remote Client the camera shortcuts cannot be used va Tip More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is available in the documentation for the Smart Client www milestonesys com Page 65 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Audio Source Administration Important Information about Using Audio If you use audio sources i e microphones and or speakers on your XProtect Enterprise system note the following e Only audio from
195. her frame rate the smoother motion in video sequence will appear FTP File Transfer Protocol a standard for exchanging files across the internet FTP uses the TCP IP standards for data transfer and is often used for uploading or downloading files to and from servers G GSM Global System for Mobile communications a system for mobile telephony GUID Globally Unique IDentifier a unique 128 bit number used to identify components on a Windows system H Host A computer connected to a TCP IP network A host has its own IP address but may depending on network configuration furthermore have a name hostname in order to make it easily identifiable Hotspot A particular position for viewing enlarged and or high quality camera video in the Smart Client HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol a standard for exchanging files across the internet HTTP is the standard used for formatting and transmission of data on the world wide web I I O Short for Input Output Image Server The Image Server handles access to the surveillance system for remote users logging in with Remote Clients or Smart Clients if the PDA Server is installed also PDA Clients The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware it runs as a service on the surveillance system server Surveillance system administrators handle Image Server configuration including remote users access rights through the Image Server Administrator application IP Interne
196. heye rendered view to the left Moves the fisheye rendered view to its home position Moves the fisheye rendered view to the right Moves the fisheye rendered view down and to the left Moves the fisheye rendered view down Moves the fisheye rendered view down and to the right Zoom out one zoom level per click TULL TT Zoom in one zoom level per click Ceiling Mounted Cameras If the camera is mounted on a ceiling you can adjust the behavior of the navigation buttons to reflect this by selecting the Ceiling Mount check box Setting a View as Home Position When previewing the fisheye rendered view you are able to set a particular position in the fisheye rendered view as the camera s PTZ home position Navigate to the required position using the navigation buttons and then click the Set View as Home Position button Image Resolution Resolution values are automatically displayed in the lower part of the window next to the navigation buttons When using fisheye resolution will automatically be set to the highest available resolution Camera Name and Number Window The Camera Name and Number window lets you edit the name of a selected camera and if required assign a shortcut number to the selected camera You access the Camera Name and Number window from the Administrator BR Stairs 10 10 691 window s see page 30 device Manager section Right click the name of the To Camel ocak required camera then select Edit from t
197. hrough a PDA Client Use of the PDA Client requires that a matching PDA Server see page 179 is installed on the surveillance system The PDA Server is installed on an Internet Information Services IIS server and is used as a front end to the XProtect Enterprise system s Image Server on which user rights are defined The PDA Server handles login and session requests between the PDA Client and the Image Server The PDA Server also handles resizing of surveillance video to fit the screen layout of the PDA Client For more information see Installing amp Configuring the PDA Server on page 180 as well as the description of the Image Server Administrator window see page 139 Deciding Which Access Client to Use When deciding which access client solution is the best choice for your organization you may find it helpful to review the following Note Systems and requirements differ from organization to organization The following questions and answers are thus for guidance only Do you require a handheld solution e Yes Use the PDA Client Server solution If required you can of course combine the PDA solution with other remote access solutions such as the Smart Client e No Determine your needs based on the questions and answers provided in the following Is it acceptable to install client software on remote users computers e Yes Use the Smart Client see page 175 e No Use the Remote Client see page 178 remote users run the Remot
198. hts Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered automatically when motion is detected by a camera The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the motion detecting camera Note The following describes one way of adding a motion triggered output namely through the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 106 Alternatively motion triggered output may be based on VMD events or if a device has its own motion detection capabilities on input events Once such VMD or input events have been added they can be tied to output through the I O Control window see page 105 In the following it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output port on the required camera or other device but that it has not yet been defined on your XProtect Enterprise system If you have already defined the output on your system begin at step 5 1 In the Administrator window see page 30 click the O Setup button Milestone XProtect Administrator H Device Manager Y ws s a BR manm Ofen Cn Y Necepter EDIDIT AM Dem PET Moche Late This will open the I O Setup window see page 86 www milestonesys com Page 121 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 2 Inthe I O Setup window see page 86 first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connecte
199. i 78 80 82 89 92 98 99 130 E Mail Alerts ScheduliDqg cti etre re aer 72 E Mail Setup nee rr EE 80 Enable Outside Access Image Server Option 139 Enabling a CAM EEN 31 Enabling an Audi SOUFte tail ia 31 a i irdisiiiiel t mE 84 96 www milestonesys com Page 197 Index Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Event Buttons Mund dote RR TERR Rex en pie Kex See a E E EEE ade Ei Rad 96 Event Buttons HOW tO Add n tet tags sg eegen Eeer 108 Event Indicato N arnser esent epe Ra ense nr SE aia 54 EVENE LOO e 157 Event Message Include Generic Events 102 Event Priority Generic Mentee iioii cia a ere tens a EUER EE ENEE EE 102 Event Protocol Generic EVents eec oer e ere a e aan 101 Event Rule Type Generic Events 101 Event Substring Generic Events ssssssssssssssssesssseee esee eese ese ese sene enn nnns 102 Event Window for PTZ Preset Positions on Event 59 Event Notifica ON ON asic dente Pc LE 54 Event PTZ Preset Position ON ir 59 Event Recording Ortus A EE SEENEN 45 ST EE 84 Events Associating With Output iiio eret tel 105 Events Gener iuris be ceder Vedere edid ere eges eder dated a rd 84 100 EVENES INPUT ri EET 84 86 88 Events Manually Triggered ccc cece eee eee nen emnes enne 84 96 Events Recording Video from Before sss eme me enne enemies n
200. i 80 Enabling E mail Alerte 80 Specifying Rechplents cece eee ee cece sees enne menm senem nn 81 Specifying Sender Gettinge cece eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenneeneeenes 81 Specifying Default Subject and Message Texte 81 Specifying Image and Interval Opttons cece eeeeeeaeeeneeeneeanes 81 Testing Your E Mail Alert Configuration c cece eeee cece eee eee e nena eens 82 SMS Settings Window coomocoonononnncannnrannncananrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrananrnnanennas 82 Enabling SMS Alerte 82 Specifying SMS Alert Gettings nemen 82 Testing Your SMS Alert Confiouration mmm 83 INPUT EVENTS amp OUTPUT eene nennen nnns OF About Input Events amp Output coccconcnconnaconcncannncanancnnrncanrncanrncananennnnos 84 Types Of EVBNMES cm coo A A A A ANEN 84 Specifying Input Events and Output 85 Using Dedicated I O Devices occcoococnorocnnnacnnranannncnnnncnnnncananennancananennans 85 I O Setup 2esksgeeesk KEE OK REKNE dE ASSIS NEESS NEEN ENKER ER ENEE KEREN GN 86 1 0 Setup Window cece III me me heh err rennen 86 Using the I O Setup Window s Defined Events List and Buttons 86 Add New Event Window for Devices Capable of Handling One Input Only 88 Multiple Input Events Window HH n 90 Add New Event Window for Devices Capable of Handling Several Inputs 91 Edit Event Window for Editing Input Events 92 New Timer Window sssssssssseeI III emen terere nenne 93 Add New
201. i file is a Microsoft Windows Installer installation package covering the complete Smart Client installation procedure You can now use your systems management tool to deploy the msi file Alternatively you can simply copy the msi file to required computers and run the msi file from a command prompt Examples C Documents and Settings you gt msiexec i C folder_to_which_file_was copied SmartClientInstaller msi quiet where msiexec calls the Windows Installer the parameter i indicates that you want to install and the parameter quiet indicates a silent installation On the target computer the Smart Client is by default installed in C Program Files Milestone Milestone Smart Client With the TARGETDIR property you are able to specify a different installation folder Example C Documents and Settings you gt msiexec I C folder_to_which_file_was copied SmartClientInstaller msi quiet TARGETDIR C required_ installation_folder www milestonesys com Page 177 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Remote Client In the following the Remote Client is briefly introduced For detailed information about the Remote Client see the Milestone XProtect Remote Client User s Manual available on the XProtect Enterprise software DVD as well as from www milestonesys com The Remote Client provides remote users with feature rich access to the surveillance system It lets users access
202. ient solution is not desirable Systems on which the Active Directory support lets you leverage existing user accounts Smart Client In the following the Smart Client is briefly introduced For detailed information about the Smart Client see the Milestone XProtect Smart Client User s Manual available on the XProtect Enterprise software DVD as well as from www milestonesys com Once installed the Smart Client also has its own built in help system The Smart Client provides users with extremely feature rich access to the surveillance system The Smart Client must be installed locally on the user s computer See system requirements for the Smart Client under System Requirements on page 16 Installation Options The Smart Client can be installed in three ways NET based thus offering a high degree of flexibility for integration of new features plugins etc Systems on which a high degree of flexibility e g use of remote access plugin features will be required Systems on which a NET client solution is desirable Systems on which the Active Directory support lets you leverage existing user accounts e Download and Install the Smart Client from the surveillance system server see page 176 www milestonesys com Page 175 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e Install the Smart Client from the XProtect Enterprise software DVD see page 176 e Silent Installation
203. if archiving is enabled for the camera If the database becomes corrupted the contents of the database will be archived D Tip Provided the corrupted database has been archived see page 125 it can be repaired by the Viewer see page 169 Open the Viewer and attempt to browse the archived recordings from the camera in question Browsing will initially fail but this will make the Viewer start repairing the corrupt database When the contents of the local database for the camera are either deleted or archived the database is reset and will be ready for storing new recordings Note Recording is not possible while the database is being repaired For large installations a repair may take several hours especially if the Repair Scan Delete if fails action involving two different repair methods is selected and the first repair method fast repair fails o Tip Learn how you can help prevent the need for repairing databases in the first place see page 163 Database Resizing In case recordings for a camera get bigger than expected or the available drive space is suddenly reduced in another way an advanced database resizing procedure will automatically take place If archives are present on the same drive as the camera s database the oldest archive for all cameras archived on that drive will be moved to another drive moving archives is only possible if you use dynamic archiving with which you can archive to several different drives s
204. ight the Live tab will not as E pes be selectable in the Remote Client Smart pras V tata gut Client Deen Stage Browse Ability to view the Browse tab in the Amina Remote Client Smart Client If a user group Ca does not have this right the Browse tab will not be selectable in the Remote Client Smart Client Setup Ability to view the Setup tab in the Remote Client Smart Client If a user group does not have this right the Setup tab will not be selectable in the Remote Client Smart Client Edit Shared Views Ability to create and edit views in shared groups in the Remote Client Smart Client Views placed in shared groups can be accessed by every Remote Client Smart Client user for more information about views see the separate Remote Client or Smart Client documentation If a user group does not have this right shared groups in the Remote Client Smart Client will be protected indicated by a padlock icon Note Views created in a Remote Client can only be shared with other Remote Client users Views created in a Smart Client can only be shared with other Smart Client users It is not possible to share views across the two types of client Edit Private Views Ability to create and edit views in private groups in the Remote Client Smart Client Views placed in private groups can only be accessed by the Remote Client Smart Client user who created them for more information about views see the separate Remote Client or Smart Client documentation If a
205. in information in the following fields e Previous Logins Only available if you have logged in before Lets you reuse previously specified login details except any password which you must always type yourself This can greatly speed up the login process www milestonesys com Page 178 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e Address Type the URL or IP address of the surveillance system server as specified by your system administrator e Port Internet connections may use different ports for different purposes Specify the port number your system administrator has asked you to use when logging in to the Remote Client In most circumstances port 80 is used e Authentication Select between different methods of authentication i e the process of verifying that you are who you claim you are Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about which authentication method to use o Windows current user with which you will be authenticated through your current Windows login and do not have to specify any user name or password This is the default authentication method i e the method which is automatically used unless you select another method o Windows with which you will be authenticated through your Windows login but you will need to type your Windows user name and password o Basic with which you will be authenticated through a user password combination defined on the surveill
206. indow see page 71 o The Recording Server service has been paused from the Service Manager window see page 70 o The Recording Server service has been stopped e Red indicates that the server or camera is not running This may because it has been unplugged or due to a network or hardware Errors are listed in the Recording Server log file see the following By placing your mouse pointer over a camera icon in the status window you will see detailed information about the camera in question The information is updated approximately every 10 seconds e Resolution Shows the resolution of the camera K Gem QuE 2 Ga serv e FPS Shows the number of frames per second i e the RitibuodUnen 1 Parking Area Camera 1 frame rate currently used by the camera The number rrr updates each time the camera has received 50 frames lt West Entrance Camer nesciution 7013576 e Frame count Shows the number of frames received from the camera since the Recording Server service was last started e Received KB Shows the number of kilobytes sent by Shee the by camera since the Recording Server service was last started e Offline Indicates the number of times the camera has been offline due to an error Viewing Recording Server amp Image Server Log Files To view the recording server log file do the following 1 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 Inthe menu that appears selec
207. ing users of these applications to move the PTZ camera to the preset positions Absolute and Relative Positioning PTZ Cameras Your configuration options depend on whether the PTZ camera in question is of the absolute positioning or relative positioning kind e Absolute For an absolute positioning PTZ camera you are able to define up to 50 preset positions You define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the required position with the controls in the PTZ View section then naming the position in the window s Preset Positions section e Relative For a relative positioning PTZ camera the number of preset positions will depend on the camera video encoder and PTZ driver used For some relative positioning PTZ cameras you will only be able to use preset positions defined on the camera video encoder itself when this is the case the preset positions are typically defined through the camera video server s built in web page For relative positioning PTZ cameras allowing definition of preset positions through the XProtect Enterprise system you define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the required position with the controls in the PTZ View section then naming the position in the window s Preset Positions section How to Define a Preset Position Note Some PTZ cameras of the relative positioning kind do not allow you to define preset positions as described in the following for such cameras you should define preset position
208. input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used You access the Multiple Input Events window by clicking the Add new event button in the I O Setup window see page 86 Note that this only applies when the device selected in the I O Setup window is capable of handling several input events Some devices are capable of handling a single input event only in which case a different window the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only see page 88 will open when the Add new event button is clicked Multiple I nput Events Window s Fields and Buttons Field Button Description Input Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input events events for are defined device Available Lists available input events for the device typically with an input event for Input rising and falling signals on each of the device s input ports For exact Event s information about what constitutes the various input events refer to documentation for the sensors and device in question My list contains event related to motion and or object detection what s this Some devices have their own capabilities for detecting motion and or moving static objects A motion or object detection related input event is very likely to be an option from such a device The settings determining this kind of detection are configured on the device itself typically by accessing a browse
209. inutes after the input event under which they are defined Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only e A camera starts based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the camera after 15 seconds e A camera starts and the lights are switched on based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the camera after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes Opens the Add New Output window see page 94 in which you are able to specify a name for the required output event which of the device s output ports to use and how long to keep the output for Lets you add a VMD Video Motion Detection event to the device selected in the Defined Events list VMD events are events triggered when XProtect Enterprise detects motion on a specific camera based on the motion detection settings defined in the Adjust Motion Detection window see page 50 Note n addition to XProtect Enterprise s motion detection some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address Events based on motion detected on a device itself are not VMD Events they are input events since they are based on input from the device VMD events can be used just like regular input events For example a PTZ Pan Ti
210. io will also be stored in one record in the database When this is the case the database s video storage capacity will be reduced to a maximum of 300 000 records because half of the database s total maximum of 600 000 records will be used for storing audio o Example If using MJ PEG audio is stored in one record for every J PEG for as long as the audio block size does not exceed the time between the J PEGs The database s video storage capacity can thus in extreme cases be reduced to a maximum of 300 000 records because half of the database s total maximum of 600 000 records will be used for storing audio If using very high frame rates where there is less time between each J PEG a smaller portion of the database will be used for storing audio records and consequently a larger portion will be available for storing video Thus a camera database s maximum video storage capacity may in some cases be halved when an associated audio source is enabled Note Above examples are simplified Since databases also have a maximum limit of 40 GB of data the exact available video storage capacity will also depend on GOP J PEG and audio kilobyte size LE Tip The Archiving feature see page 125 enables you to store recordings beyond the capabilities of cameras databases Even if already using archiving you may want to archive more frequently if recording audio and video than if only recording video www milestonesys com Page 66 Audio S
211. ion 143 Language Support and XML Encoding Section 143 Good to Know Client Access to Stopped Cameras 144 Define Local IP Ranges Window occoccoroconcocnnracancncnnracanrncanrncanancananes 144 User Administration Window coocccoonononnncannncanancnnnnrananrannnrananennaneanans 144 www milestonesys com Page 10 Contents Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m What Is Active Directonm meses 145 How to Add a New Basic User 146 How to Add a New Windows User or Group 146 How to Edit an Existing User Name or Password 147 How to Remove an Existing User 147 What Information to Provide to User 147 Define User Rights Window cccmococnococnorocnnracnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncanrncnnrncananes 148 Slave Administration Window eeseeee esee nennen nnne nan 151 Adding a Slave Server ssssssssssssssssssses seen eese nns 151 Removing a Slave Gerver eese nnn 151 End User Documentation cccococnonocnncncnnracancncnnracanencnnracanrncnnrncanancnnanos 151 DOWNLOAD MANAGER eren LOD The Welcome Page eoocccoococoonoroncnrannnrannnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrannnrnnnnrnnanrnnnrananensas 152 Download Manager s Default Configuration eese 153 Download Manager s Tree Structure 153 Making New Features Available eeeeeeeese eene nennen 154 Hiding and Removing Features ccccococnoroconraconracnnrncanrncnnrncanrncnnra
212. ion Regions window see page 52 where you are able to disable motion detection in specific areas of the camera s images Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background Database Settings The database for each camera is capable of containing a maximum of 600 000 records or 40 GB per day Note that camera databases also store recorded audio from associated audio sources see Important Information about Using Audio page 66 for more information LE Tip By using archiving see page 125 it is possible to store recordings beyond the capabilities of the camera s database The Database settings section lets you specify database settings for the camera such as where the database containing the camera s recordings should be kept how much to store etc You specify this information in the following fields www milestonesys com Page 46 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e Max records in database Select this option to limit the database size based on a maximum allowed number of records in the database Specify required maximum number of records in the neighboring field When the database reaches the maximum number of records the oldest record in the database will automatically be overwritten Note A database can contain a ma
213. ise is an easy task and you need not worry about spending hours reconfiguring your software The following information applies if upgrading from one XProtect Enterprise version to another as well as if upgrading to XProtect Enterprise from a lower product in the XProtect product portfolio Prerequisites e Take note of your SLC Software License Code The SLC will change when the software version number changes e f your SLC has changed so have your DLKs Device License Keys Go to the Milestone website www milestonesys com and log in to the Software Registration Service Center Under the properties for your license click the Get DLKs by e mail link When you receive the dlk file save it on the computer running the XProtect Enterprise server e f you do not already have the new XProtect Enterprise new go to www milestonesys com and download the most current version which you are allowed to install with your SLC Backing Up Your Current Configuration It is generally a good idea to make regular backups of your server configuration as a disaster recovery measure Upgrading your server is no exception While it is rare to lose your configuration cameras schedules views etc it can happen under certain circumstances Luckily it takes only a minute to back up your existing configuration 1 Create a folder called Backup on the desktop of your XProtect Enterprise server on a network drive or on removable media 2 Open My Co
214. istrator window see page 30 For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the generic event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on XProtect Enterprise CH Tip See also How to Test a Generic Event below How to Test a Generic Event Once you have added a generic event see How to Add a Generic Event on page 112 a quick and easy way to test your generic event is to first set up an event notification and then use Telnet to send a small amount of data which will trigger the generic event and in turn the event notification 2 What is Telnet Telnet is a terminal emulation program used on TCP IP networks With Telnet you can connect to a server from a computer on the network and execute commands through Telnet as if you were entering them directly on the server Windows includes a client for use with Telnet For this example we have created a generic event called Video Our generic event simply specifies that if the term video appears in a received TCP data package the generic event should be triggered Your generic event may be different but you can still use the principles outlined in the following 1 Inthe Administrator window see page 30 first select a camera from which you are able to view video in a Remote Client Smart Client then click the Settings button Milestone XProtect Administrator H Device Manage Sa 4 155502 Mag 028 OWL beue Once 4 KE Necegnan Service Man
215. ith DLKs System administrators obtain DLKs as part of the software registration process System administrators use the Import DLKs feature in the Administrator application to import DLKs into the surveillance system DNS Domain Name System a system that allows translation between alphabetic host names example mycomputer or domain names example www mydomain com and numeric IP addresses example 192 168 212 2 Many people find alphabetic names easier to remember than numeric IP addresses Driver A small program used for controlling communicating with a device DST Daylight Saving Time a k a summer time the practice of advancing clocks in order for evenings to have more daylight and mornings to have less DVR Digital Video Recorder www milestonesys com Page 190 Glossary Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual F Fisheye A technology that allows creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images FPS Frames Per Second a measure indicating the amount of information contained in motion video Each frame represents a still image but when frames are displayed in succession the illusion of motion is created The higher the FPS the smoother the motion will appear Note however that a high FPS may also lead to a large file size when video is saved Frame Rate A measure indicating the amount of information contained in motion video Frame rate is typically measured in FPS Frames Per second The hig
216. ive video use a Smart Client see page 175 The Smart Client has features for viewing live video which are far superior to those previously available in the Monitor application e Tip A Smart Client is automatically installed on the surveillance system server as part of the XProtect Enterprise installation o Tip The Monitor application also included the so called Viewer application for browsing recorded video The Viewer is still available although we recommend the Smart Client for browsing recorded video If you want to use the Viewer see page 169 access it from Windows Start menu Select Start gt All Programs gt Milestone XProtect Enterprise gt Viewer www milestonesys com Page 170 Monitor Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Matrix Monitor Milestone XProtect Matrix is an integrated product allowing distributed viewing of video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with XProtect Enterprise A computer on which Matrix triggered video can be shown is known as a Matrix recipient Being able to view Matrix triggered video requires that either the Matrix Monitor application or a Smart Client see page 175 is installed on the Matrix recipient computer Example Viewing video in the Matrix Monitor application There are two ways in which Matrix triggered video can appear on a Matrix recipient e Another user wants to share important video and sends it from the surveillance system
217. ived dlk file 3 Select the file and click Open All DLKs are now automatically imported and the relevant DLK will automatically appear when you add a device through the Device Setup Wizard www milestonesys com Page 35 Import of DLKs Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual IP Device Administration How to Add a Device In XProtect Enterprise you add devices IP video camera devices IP video encoder devices or digital video recorder devices DVR devices rather than actual cameras This is because devices have their own IP addresses sometimes also host names for easier identification on the network Being IP based XProtect Enterprise primarily identifies units on the surveillance system based on their IP addresses or host names Example of IP address 123 123 123 123 Example of hostname OurDevice Even though each device has its own IP address host name several cameras can be attached to a single device and thus share the same IP address host name This is typically the case with cameras attached to video encoder devices or DVR devices You can of course configure and use each camera individually even when several cameras are attached to a single device In addition to IP video camera devices IP video encoder devices and DVR devices it is possible to add a number of dedicated I O input output devices to XProtect Enterprise When such I O devices are added they can be used in events based system setu
218. lation of End User Features cece cece memes 154 Service Manager WINdOW crie a a Mena nha rta Dee Dag E RT LE a CARERE ERRAT 70 Setup Notifications on Events Window ccc I meme he enhn nennen 54 Setup PTZ Patrolling WindOW e NEE coe mae teta EE evene se Rape Pt de Rm clea tae eter E EY 60 Setup Tab el ana ds ar aia 149 Shared Groups Een uis cos a dd a QUERI bd 149 Shortcut Numbers Assigning to Cameras s sssssssssrrstritsrrttttrn ttrt mme esee nnns 31 41 64 Klee Le te WEE 89 92 Silent Installation Smart Client excess e knee a pe 177 Slave Administration WInQOW uir nns ti iii 151 Slave See RS ier PE 141 151 Slave Servers Pre 6 0 V tslgnt ng E eege ee o 142 SUE EE 141 151 SLC Laa UT 30 141 SMart Cll A A A Sed a ee eee 175 Smart Client Private Groups seit si ici ir Rua deele SE 149 Smart Client Server Side Installation of 154 Smart Client Shared Groups si pea 149 Smart Client Silent Installation of 177 SMS Alerts ie T cL 78 89 92 99 104 131 SMS Alerts Scheduling cir o 72 SMS Settings WINdO EE 82 SMTP scada 80 81 SMTP BEER den io 95 www milestonesys com Page 203 Index Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Software License Code ninia ri aida a A iS 30 141 Software e IEN Ce TEE 21 Software Updates siii io a 15 Software Minimum Requirements c ccc eee rre esse ese nre ese enn nns 16 Speaker Settings WIN Wi deceased ete Pe eee eee mie eee det D in
219. lative BIZ 56 Pre Post BUMMER miran E EE bn 45 Pre 6 0 Version SlaVe Shenoni ees Ee eege eegen SE 142 Preset POSIGIONS sonia UULTUS 56 59 Preset Positions from Device USIN nn memes esie eser enn nene nnn 58 Preset Positions Patrolling between 60 Preview Images Date vex ett me rk ex ba deed pend ede E M ds 50 Previous Version Upgrading from 25 Private Groups Client dd IR a FR ae Ra E Dx YR EAR PERRA 149 HP E M H E 40 56 60 PTZ Patrol s beoe dere A da 60 PTZ Patrolling Resuming after Interruption 0c emnes seme nnne 77 PTZ Patrolling Scheduling orte ttp AR 72 74 PTZ Preset POSItIONS EE 56 59 PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name Window eme 56 PTZ Preset Positions from Device Ueing nn nr nr rr meses nnn 58 MARIS iia le da lides 62 PTZ Absolute and Relative Posittoning Henne nne 56 Public IP Address iii Eer ca Pad P een du P bait d ACA E 139 Q Quiet Installation Smart Client 177 R RAM Minimum Requirements 0ooccccocnccccncnccncnccncncnccnnncnnnnennnnrnn nr eese enis ese esses enne nnn 16 Recording e M U 44 71 Recording Frame Rate eios D tH dad RF RR tid de bed dd 44 RecordingOn EVENEsis OUI 45 Recording OM Motion EE 45 Recording Server Manager 68 Recording Server Service 0 semen esee memes sess sess e eere eres nnn nnn 68 Recording Server Service Log 157 Recording Server
220. le of handling one input event only 3 Inthe Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only see page 88 the External sensor connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields Sensor connected through Select the camera device input port on which the input unit is connected Some cameras devices only have a single input port in that case simply select Input idea H 1 Esteras serca cormecteg to ex Event occurs when input goes Select whether the n nz input event should be triggered when the signal on ee the input sensor rises High or falls Low ATA External event name Specify a name for the event Sus seo Note that event names must not contain the A following characters lt gt Y A c Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window see page 80 If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this even
221. led generic events e Events may be based on XProtect Enterprise detecting motion on a camera Such events are called VMD i e Video Motion Detection events e Finally events may be generated manually by users selecting them in their access clients Such manually selectable events are traditionally called event buttons Milestone XProtect Recording Manual M 4 b P PTZ External Input Unit ca 4 Device s Detection Event I External Output Unit Generic TCP UDP Y Notification Other www milestonesys com Page 84 Input Events Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Specifying Input Events and Output In XProtect Enterprise your main entry point for configuration of input event and output handling is the Administrator window see page 30 e By clicking the Administrator window s I O Setup button you open the I O Setup window see page 86 in which you are able to specify each individual input event VMD event and output e By clicking the Administrator windows Event Buttons button you open the Event Buttons window see page 96 in which you are able to specify event buttons for manually triggering events controlled activity e By clicking the Administrator windows Generic Events button you open the Generic Events window see page 100 in which you are able to specify generic events e By clicking the Administrator window s I O Control button you open the I O Con
222. live and playback audio digital zoom timeline browsing etc The Smart Client should always be downloaded from the surveillance system server and installed locally on remote users PCs SMS Short Message Service a system for sending text messages to mobile phones SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol a standard for sending e mail messages between mail servers Subnet A part of a network Dividing a network into subnets can be advantageous for management and security reasons and may in some cases also help improve performance On TCP IP based networks a subnet is basically a part of a network on which all devices share the same prefix in their IP addresses for example 123 123 123 xxx where 123 123 123 is the shared prefix Network administrators use so called subnet masks to divide networks into subnets T TCP Transmission Control Protocol a protocol i e standard used for sending data packets across networks IP is often combined with another protocol IP Internet Protocol The combination known as TCP IP allows data packets to be sent back and forth between two points on a network for longer periods of time and is used when connecting computers and other devices on the internet TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol a combination of protocols i e standards used when connecting computers and other devices on networks including the internet Telnet A terminal emulation program used on TCP IP networks
223. ll Programs gt Milestone XProtect Enterprise gt Viewer e By people who have received video evidence material from your surveillance system This type of users are typically police officers internal or external investigators or similar When Smart Client see page 175 operators export video evidence they are able to include the Viewer with the exported evidence This is a great advantage for the recipient of the exported evidence since no installation is required in order to use the Viewer for browsing exported evidence E mo x 77 D a Kiem 13 23 25 Wi a lt e BI In this example the Viewer displays video from a single camera the Viewer can display video from several cameras simultaneously Note that content of the Viewer s toolbar may vary depending on configuration O Where can I find more information about the Viewer The Viewer has its own built in help system Alternatively refer to the Viewer User s Manual available on the XProtect Enterprise software DVD as well as from www milestonesys com www milestonesys com Page 169 Viewer Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Monitor Where Is the Monitor Application If you have used previous versions of XProtect Enterprise you may note that the Monitor application for viewing of live video on the surveillance system server itself has been discontinued as from XProtect Enterprise version 6 5 When you want to view l
224. lt Zoom camera could move to a specific preset position when a VMD event occurs Only one VMD event can be defined per camera In order to www milestonesys com Page 87 Input Events Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Edit selected Remove selected Advanced avoid the risk of an excessively high number of VMD events being generated a VMD event cannot occur more frequently than every five seconds The Add VMD Event Motion Detection button works slightly different depending on whether the selected device is a single camera device or a multi camera device such as a video encoder e Single camera devices Clicking the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button will instantly add a VMD event to the selected device provided a VMD event has not already been defined for the device e Multi camera devices Clicking the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button will open a simple dialog in which you select the required camera This way you are able to define a VMD event for each camera on a multi camera device Lets you edit the settings for an item selected in the Defined events list For devices capable of handling a single input event only the button will open the Edit Event window for editing input events see page 92 For devices capable of handling several input events the button will open the Multiple Input Events window see page 90 If the selected item is a timer event the but
225. m bem b tiene 67 Speakers dee oe e EE hanes a ee beali s Uem eot rrt EUR iy eines GUI ee o Re 150 Speakers Associating with Camera 45 Speakers Important Information about USIN s s ssssrrssrsrssrrstsrrt ntir n nrr rutin rt trrn runan rn nann n narrant 66 Special io 44 Speedup Frame Rate EE 44 SSL E Mail Alerts Not Working with 81 Standard Time Daylight Saving Time 168 Start Cameras on Remote Live Reouest rr esee 78 Start EVEN e A di 72 Starting the Recording Server Service 68 Static ACHIVING domini seg tabe ns drea circ veri aloe ted dni be ek 131 133 Status Mohltorifig ceci eri ra dai 68 STOP GEET 73 Stopping the Recording Server Service 68 70 cel cm ETE 140 144 Ss mmer Winter TIME iia neret re e Rr eni ea RR A ke dr red undis 168 Support Finding License Information if Requiring sssssssse Henn 30 Support Finding Version Information if Requiring mns 30 70 System Requiretrients Reese eege E AER REY E EE EES Ee EE 16 System Status Mere at dr iia 68 T Target Audiences eege an 2 Ke LE 100 101 Ene LU TITULI 114 Text Message Mobile Phone ES reae betta ree ext rie EN eden e DURER E Ed dd See SMS Time cM 50 TIME EVEN vss a oes ege ee PA heres A DUNT E CEP ERES eee 86 93 97 Timer Events How to Add ee reete eri aaa RE NR TREE RE I Ea EP EX seeds bare eir yuan 116 Timestamp in Vun Cie CEET 50 Trademark Sirs arra O mo EE 3 TANS le NEE 33 Tree Structure in Download Manager 15
226. mera database must still be stored on a local drive i e a drive attached directly to the computer running the XProtect Enterprise system Archiving Audio If audio is enabled on a device audio from the device will also be archived If the device is a video encoder with several channels audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1 When an audio source is enabled audio is recorded to the associated camera s database This will affect the database s capacity for storing video It is thus important to bear in mind that the maximum limit of the database is likely to be reached earlier if recording audio and video than if only recording video You may thus want to archive more frequently if recording audio and video than if only recording video Storage Capacity Required for Archiving The storage capacity required for archiving depends entirely on the amount of recordings you plan to archive Some organizations want to keep archived recordings from a large number of cameras for several months or years Other organizations may only want to archive recordings from one or two cameras and they may want to keep their archives for much shorter periods of time Before enabling archiving you should always consider the storage capacity of the local drive containing the default archiving directory to which archives are always moved even though they may immediately after be moved to an archiving location on a network drive As a rule of thumb
227. microphones is recorded Only incoming audio i e audio recorded by microphones attached to cameras is recorded Outgoing audio i e what Smart Client operators say when they talk through speakers attached to cameras is not recorded e Audio from microphones is recorded even when video is not When a microphone is enabled see Microphone Settings Window described on page 67 audio from the microphone will be recorded whenever the associated camera is online i e transmitting data to XProtect Enterprise see Camera Alert Scheduler Window on page 71 regardless whether video from the camera is being recorded or not Depending on your cameras recording settings this may mean that when you play back recordings you may find that there are periods for which you only have audio recordings This will also be the case for exported recordings if audio has been included in the export e Audio recording affects video storage capacity When a microphone is enabled audio is recorded to the associated camera s database This will affect the database s capacity for storing video A camera s database can contain a maximum of 40 GB or 600 000 records It is thus important to bear in mind that the maximum limit of the database is likely to be reached earlier if recording audio and video than if only recording video o Example If using MPEG4 each one second video GOP Group Of Pictures will be stored in one record in the database Each second of aud
228. milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Target Audience for this Document This document covers Milestone XProtect Enterprise from a surveillance system administrator s perspective It is solely aimed at XProtect Enterprise system administrators and administrator rights are likely to be required in order to be able to access the majority of features described in this document This document provides detailed descriptions of XProtect Enterprise system administration features It furthermore provides a large number of targeted how to examples guiding administrators through completing common administration tasks in XProtect Enterprise This document contains very limited end user related documentation Administrators requiring information about end user related applications such as the remote access clients should refer to the targeted manuals available on the XProtect Enterprise software DVD as well as from www milestonesys com Users who do not have surveillance system administrator responsibilities such as users of the Viewer Remote Client Smart Client PDA Client or Matrix Monitor will find that this manual is not of relevance to them Such users will be able to find information targeted at their needs in the separate manuals available on the XProtect Enterprise software DVD as well as from www milestonesys com www milestonesys com Target A
229. mputer and navigate to C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance www milestonesys com Page 25 Installation Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 3 Copy the following files and folders into your Backup folder e Al configuration ini files e Al scheduling sch files e The file users txt not found in most installations e The folder SmartClientViewGroups and all of its content e The folder RemoteClientViewGroups and all of its content Note that some of the folders may not exist if upgrading from old software versions Removing the Current Version XProtect Enterprise versions 6 0a or later can automatically be removed during installation of the new version When installing the new version simply answer Yes if asked if you accept such automatic removal The automatic removal will not delete any existing recordings or configuration XProtect Enterprise versions older than 6 0 as well as lower products in the XProtect product portfolio must be removed manually before installing the new version Manually removing the old version involves removing two components on the server Removing these components will not remove your configuration files 1 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 2 Remove Milestone XProtect Enterprise or the lower XProtect product 3 When asked if you want to remove database files or registry settings you should normally not select any of the ch
230. n page 36 When you have selected a device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Edit Device button lets you edit settings for the selected device in the Edit device settings window see page 38 Lets you remove a device selected in the Administrator window s Device Manager section In order to prevent accidental removal of devices you will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the device Lets you specify settings for a selected camera or audio source www milestonesys com Page 33 Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual I O Setup Event Buttons Generic Events I O Control Exit e Cameras When you have selected a camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Settings button will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 in which you specify camera settings e Audio sources When you have selected a microphone or a speaker in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Settings button will open the Microphone Settings window see page 67 or the Speaker Settings window see page 67 in which you can enable disable the microphone or speaker and change its name if required Opens the I O Setup window see page 86 in which you are able to define events based on input events for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened and VMD Video
231. n start and stop the Recording Server service view log files etc Starting and Stopping the Recording Server To start the Recording Server service do the following 1 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 Inthe menu that appears select Start Recording Server Service 3 The icon changes to green To stop the Recording Server service do the following l Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 In the menu that appears select Stop Recording Server Service 3 The icon changes to red Opening the Administrator Application 1 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 In the menu that appears select Open Administrator Monitoring System Status By right clicking the notification area s Recording Server icon and then selecting Show System Status you get access to the Status window Alternatively simply double click the icon The Status window lets you view the status of the image server s and connected cameras The status of each server camera is indicated by a color e Green indicates that the server or camera is running correctly www milestonesys com Page 68 Recording Server Service Management Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e Gray indicates that the camera not the server is not running Typically a camera will be indicated in gray in the following situations o The camera has been set offline in the Camera Alert Scheduler w
232. nns 45 Events Sending Video to Matrix Recipients on ssssssssssssss mmn ens 137 Events VMD coo oie eterne entidad ERR EE dE SEELEN ERU RR RU AA 84 86 Eventer alegre 90 91 Exclamation Mark Red attt eren RERET Enn ads 137 Exclude Regions Motion Detection Setting 52 degli a As 158 F Fl Key oisitecxe ett eni RA ARENUGR cta 28 slliseicileleiptm mt tc RR 89 92 tere ee dao 37 139 HN A A A Dl Ea 46 62 Fisheye Camera Configuration Wipdow III e meme enne nnns 62 Frame Rate Recording viii e oe rd eR Ee ie en VE px e Pu Cdp C nu 44 Frame Rate Speed see o ERR EA ER ged M baad ele E FRU M EUR E E ER dos 44 FIP Server Portas aa 95 G General Settings WINdOW e o ada desde 76 Generic Events iris e EE eege e 84 100 Generic Events WIndOoW ini a di 100 Generic Events HOW to Add eco NENNEN a fc 112 Generic Events How tofeet nemen emen seme emesee ems e ees ess nie ese n nnn 114 e inu afoibzim puo CER DE M TM lord 21 www milestonesys com Page 198 Index Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Global Event WEED EE EE stan 97 Cl Visit OA Ea 190 Graphics Adapter Minimum Requirements cece cece me meses messes 16 e MOI mM MMTSTST 82 H Hard Disk Minimum Reouirements stran trnu nr ess eene esee nn nnn 16 Help System Bultaco Rote Rios per bap paci iru pU Seed 28 69 High Sensor ET ul WEE 89 92 ea NE e E 84 1 O Control D
233. ns in one go 2 Click the gt gt button to copy the selected preset positions to the Patrolling list 3 The camera will move between preset positions in the sequence they appear in the Patrolling list starting at the preset position listed first If you want to change the sequence of preset positions in the Preset Positions list select a preset position name and use the move up or move down buttons to move the selected preset position name To remove a preset position from the Patrolling list select the preset position in question and click the button Specifying Timing Settings for a PTZ Patrol Scheme Having selected a patrolling scheme in the Patrol scheme list you are able to specify timing settings for the patrol scheme l In the Stay at each position in the patrol schedule field specify the number of seconds for which the PTZ camera should stay at each preset position www milestonesys com Page 61 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 2 Inthe Time for each PTZ camera movement to complete field specify the number of seconds required for the PTZ camera to move between preset positions In order not to generate false motion alarms motion detection for the PTZ camera is automatically disabled while the camera moves between two preset positions After the specified number of seconds motion detection is automatically enabled again It is thus important that the camera is abl
234. nts Available only when dealing with a PTZ fem ue Pan Tilt Zoom camera the Event window for LI Bes ei Pestana preset positions on events lets you associate eem particular preset positions with particular events pe tros timer events or event buttons You are thus able to iech make the PTZ camera automatically go to a epe particular preset position when a particular event pe occurs E To access the Event window for preset positions on LA les events click the Setup button in Preset Position on Events section of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window see page 56 Note To use preset positions on events you must have specified input or VMD events see page 86 event buttons see page 96 or generic events see page 100 Only one PTZ preset position can be defined per event per camera Associating Preset Positions with Particular Events When associating a preset position from a particular PTZ camera with one or more events you are able to select between all events defined on the XProtect Enterprise system you are not limited to selecting events defined on a particular device To associate a particular preset position with a particular event do the following 1 Select the required preset position in the Available Preset Positions list in the left side of the Event window 2 Select the required event in the list of available events the list in the middle of the window 3 Click the gt gt
235. numbers are only used in the Smart Client see page 175 In other applications such as the Remote Client see page 178 the camera shortcuts cannot be used o Tip More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is available in the documentation for the Smart Client Editing Settings for Audio Sources To edit the settings for an audio source that is a microphone or a speaker BR Lab Audio 10 10 50 64 listed in the Device Manager section click the plus sign next to the device to at Camera 1 which the audio source is attached select the required audio source and A Wirophone 1 then click the Settings button to open the Microphone Settings window see dou N page 67 or the Speaker Settings window see page 67 IMPORTANT The use of microphones will impact the database capacity for storing video see Important Information on page 66 about Using Audio for more information Disabling Enabling Cameras and Audio Sources Individual cameras and audio sources listed in the Device Manager section are by default disabled meaning that video from cameras and audio from attached microphones is by default transferred to www milestonesys com Page 31 Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual XProtect Enterprise provided that the cameras are marked as online in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window also default see page 71 Note On some devices audio can also be enabled disabled on the device itself
236. o control the sequence in which the outputs will be displayed in the Remote Client see page 178 and Smart Client see page 175 By using the up and down www milestonesys com Page 120 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual buttons located to the right of the list you can change a selected output s position in the sequence e The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 106 also lets you select output for automatic triggering on detected motion This is further described in How to Add a Motion Triggered Output on page 121 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 9 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return to the Administrator window see page 30 10 Close the Administrator The defined output will now be available in the Remote Client Client Smart Client as described in the beginning of this text Note that individual users rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and or output in the Remote Client and Smart Client such rights are defined through the Image Server Administrator window see page 139 How to Add a Motion Triggered Output Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rig
237. o different Boolean operators in the Event message include field by clicking the buttons to the right of the field Send Email if this event occurs Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send Email if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window see page 80 If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box Send SMS if this event occurs Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window see page 82 ready click OK This will return you to the Generic Events window see page 100 nesys com Page 113 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 4 Inthe Generic Events window your newly defined event is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the Generic item to see the listing Generic Cvents IS Denm goen T Gere Ra My Gere E vorti At re mt Click OK to close the Generic Event window and return to the Admin
238. o remove ta selected program thors your device and this computer cick Remove Hemove Click the Remove button to remove the PDA Client e cue software from the PDA as well mm es He Removing the Matrix Monitor Application Prerequisites Before removing the Matrix Monitor application make sure the application is not running If the Matrix Monitor application is running shut it down by right clicking the Matrix Monitor icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen then selecting Exit Note that before the application closes you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your Matrix Monitor 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 2 In the Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select Milestone XProtect Matrix Monitor 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions www milestonesys com Page 188 Removal Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Removing Installation Files for End User Features Upon installation of XProtect Enterprise your surveillance system server by default contains installation files for a number of end user features The installation files lets you install the end user features on the surveillance system server and make them available to your organization s users through t
239. o that drive will only take place from cameras recording to that drive In that case you should select one or more other drives for archiving so that archiving from other databases will also take place Alternatively you should avoid using the same drive for both recording and archiving IMPORTANT If you have more that one surveillance server each surveillance server must archive to its own mapped location in order for archiving to work If you try to archive to the same mapped location from all the servers archiving will not work Archiving Audio If audio is enabled on a device audio from the device will also be archived If the device is a video encoder with several channels audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1 www milestonesys com Page 134 Archiving Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Matrix Administration Matrix Configuration Window Matrix allows distributed viewing of live video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with XProtect Enterprise A computer on which Matrix triggered video can be displayed is known as a Matrix recipient Being able to view Matrix triggered video requires that either a Smart Client see page 175 or the dedicated Matrix Monitor software is installed on the user s computer You access the Matrix Configuration window by Milestone XProtect Matrix Configuration Wwe clicking the Matrix button in the Administrator Contig Evert
240. of log file www milestonesys com Page 159 The log file exists but does not contain the expected information Thus log integrity cannot be guaranteed The log file was not present The log file was present but empty The last line of the log file did not match validation criteria The encrypted part of the log line in question was not present The log line does not match the encrypted part The log file header is not correct This situation is most likely to occur if a user has attempted to delete the beginning of a log file Logging Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Video Device Drivers Updating Video Device Drivers Video device drivers are small programs used for controlling communicating with the camera devices connected to an XProtect Enterprise system The XProtect Video Device Drivers should therefore be installed on your XProtect Enterprise system Video device drivers are installed automatically during the initial installation of your XProtect Enterprise system However new versions of XProtect Video Device Drivers are released and made available on the Milestone website www milestonesys com from time to time When updating your system s XProtect Video Device Drivers it is recommended that you remove the old version of the drivers before installing the new version IMPORTANT When you remove your XProtect Enterprise system s video device drivers your system will not be a
241. on Canes a Settings tor Vers Camera Y Sends OTD ed Panem ste 4 feet pm Sew 9 AEDn bw mage frr tm heared haer en Ce Dems m Amen mage tr enie H Ue mme reg heme ge Same m recobro ee mom DE AS mf nh menge Mens rra magm n ae det Gemeen DES item Condy Mutin detecte settings Menor Lector mre pd om ordre on ee cert leare begro D dmm mn t Mas records n database Mas Iess Pd omn Aches monat dis hen la a Orton arrows i hae hime of dat dime Ihn ibe to Penn rtm nm Quai btw nh Oups This will open the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 106 7 n the All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output then click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Output Settings for Stairs Camera 1 K l Mame Seen Output 1 Damon recorda This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list which lists all outputs available for manual control when viewing live video from the camera in question Good to know e You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If output has been defined on other cameras devices on the XProtect Enterprise system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list e An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way e If you have specified several outputs in the On Manual Control list you are able t
242. on Services Manager s right pane select ASP NET v2 0 50727 and click the Allow button CH Tip When IIS and NET Framework have been installed and registered it is a good idea to use Windows Update to check for and download any new service packs or security packs Installing the PDA Server To Install the PDA Server do the following www milestonesys com Page 181 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Note The following procedures describe installation of the PDA Server as the only application using IIS on the server and with its default settings If IIS is also used for other applications it is recommended that you consult an experienced IIS administrator prior to installing the PDA Server First IIS Port Configuration Before you begin installing the PDA Server you must configure IIS to use the port number on which the PDA Server is going to run 1 In Windows Start menu select Run 2 Inthe Open field type inetmgr exe and click OK This will display the Internet Information Services dialog 3 Inthe left part of the dialog expand the computer item until you see the Default Web Site item Internet Information Services E JRA local computer web Sites Default SMTP Virtual Server Example only details enlarged for clarity computer name is likely to be different on your server 4 Right click the Default Web Site item and select Properties This will o
243. one preset position is possible A patrol scheme with only one preset position can when combined with scheduling see page 71 be useful in two cases For moving a PTZ camera to a specific position at a specific time and for moving a PTZ camera to a specific position upon manual PTZ control of the camera Note When you have defined your patrol schemes also remember to schedule use of the patrol schemes in the Camera Alert Scheduler window see page 71 Note Bear in mind that patrolling can be overridden if operators with the necessary user rights manually control PTZ cameras Patrol Scheme A PTZ camera may patrol according to several different patrol schemes For example a PTZ camera in a supermarket may patrol according to one patrol scheme during opening hours and according to another patrol scheme when the supermarket is closed The Patrol scheme list lets you select which patrol scheme to configure Defining a New Patrol Scheme To define a new patrol scheme click the New button This will add a New patrol scheme listing to the Patrol scheme list To change the name from New patrol scheme to a name of your choice select the New patrol scheme listing and click the Rename button www milestonesys com Page 60 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Copying an Existing Patrol Scheme If you want to create a new patrol scheme based on an existing one you can copy the existing pat
244. ons you have device defined for the PTZ camera you will therefore be asked to confirm your selection Note In order for preset positions from the camera or video encoder device to work with XProtect Enterprise the names of the preset positions must contain only the characters A Z a z and 0 9 and must not contain spaces If preset position names on the camera or video encoder device contain other characters or spaces change the preset position names on the device before selecting the Use preset positions from device feature Set Associates the preset position selected in the list with the position specified in the Position PTZ View section If the preset position selected in the list is yet undefined you will be asked to specify a name for the preset position Edit Lets you edit a preset position name selected in the list Only works for an Name already defined preset position name Test Lets you test a defined preset position Select the required preset position in the list then click the Test button The effect is displayed instantly in the PTZ View section Delete Lets you delete a preset position selected in the list When a preset position name is deleted it will appear as undefined in the list Move up Lets you move a preset position selected in the list up and down respectively The selected preset position is moved one step per click By moving preset Move position up or down you are able to control the sequence in which a
245. ophones Important Information about USIN cece eee e eee memes 66 Microsoft Windows Vista Important Information for Users of 24 Milestone Offlces eeu ue ai E MIR IRI Ia DR dE KM RF RID ERO AGE ERA dE 206 Milestone XProtect Central Settings Wimdow cece cece eee e eee eee Imm meme emnes ns 79 Monitor Application Discontinued Alternatives fo 170 ls elei NR Ee Mises tH ERES 45 46 50 Motion Detection Disabling in Parts Of Image 0 cece cece eee eee Hem ens 52 Motion Detection How PTZ Patrolling Should React on 62 Motion Detection Output ODn cioe ct tbt ei ie da di 54 106 Motion Sensitivity oc EU 51 www milestonesys com Page 200 Index Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Motion Recording en taste caen arta 45 Motion Recording Video from Before oocococcococcccncnccnnnccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn eee nnn 45 Motion Triggered Output How to Add 121 Multiple Input Events WINdOW vecino be en e a Re UR e Rd E ARR Iu ENEE E 90 N NAT a 37 Network Minimum Reouirements nr ees esse nre ese eene nnn 16 New Timer WINKOW EET 93 NOISE SONSIEIVIE EE 51 NOM O OOO dig hdenais r Eaa RG eeda awe Ear EA dian Qaeda da ieb ria da tose deplete cl APO Senedd 145 o Object Ree Tu EE 90 On Event Recording ecce iv cd ii 45 On Motion Recording i e po bell diee das ue alloted id lesa eru Ubro DUM a neice 45 Online Perosio dp Peres Faser cx uc Res ha utei du uites DR 71 Operating Sys
246. opos o pr monde n daro j Mas nsns P del adim J Sieg mince stan gen a AA cane d da ger tate Te Polen ator map eg mt rete ara This will open the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 106 7 In the All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output then click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list which lists all outputs to be automatically triggered when motion is detected by the camera www milestonesys com Page 123 Output Information Name Seen Output 1 Daston S condit Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Good to know e You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If output has been defined on other cameras devices on the XProtect Enterprise system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list e Anunlimited number of outputs may be selected this way e The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window also lets you select output for manual triggering in the Remote Client and Smart Client This is further described in How to Add a Manually Controlled Output on page 118 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device
247. or Lets you select which of the device s input ports the sensor used for the input connected event should be connected to through Event occurs when input goes External event name Lets you select whether the input event should be triggered when the signal on the input sensor rises or falls e Low Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is falling e High Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the sensor and device in question Lets you edit the name of the input event Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Some camera devices only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Send e mail Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs In order to be if this event able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the occurs E Mail setup window see page 80 Include Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected image from Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is camera triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs
248. orgar 4 Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar exact wording depends on your browser version When this is the case accept the security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button names depend on your browser version 5 The Smart Client Setup Wizard begins In the wizard click Next and follow the installation instructions Installation from DVD Typically you download the Smart Client from the surveillance system server then install it on your computer see Download and Installation from Server on page 176 Alternatively your surveillance system administrator may ask you to install the Smart Client from a DVD 1 Verify that your computer meets the Smart Client s minimum system requirements www milestonesys com Page 176 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Insert the surveillance system software DVD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install Milestone XProtect Smart Client link e Tip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar exact wording depends on your browser version When this is the case accept the security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button names depend on your browser
249. ortcut Numbers to Cameras occccccncconncnnananannncnnncnnnns 31 Editing Settings for Audio Sources 31 Disabling Enabling Cameras and Audio Sources 31 Administrator Window s Buttons 32 DEVICE LICENSE KEYS DLKS eene enne OD How to Import Device License Keys eere nnn 35 IP DEVICE ADMINISTRATION nennen nnns DO How to Add a DeViCe cocococcoconcoconnnrannnrannnrannnrananrnnanrnnnnrnnnnrannnennanrnnanennans 36 Edit Device Settings Window omccoonoconnoronnnrannnnannnrnnnnrnnnnrananrnnanrananennans 38 Camera Settings for Device Name Window 40 Using DVR DevicCeS ocococoococoncncnoracnnnncnnrncannncnnrncnnnncnnrnrnnnnennnnrnnanennanennane 42 CAMERA ADMINISTRATION eene nennen 43 Adding and Configuring CaMeraS ccoonncnonoconcncnnnncannncnnrncanancanrncanancnnanos 43 Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window 43 Speedup Settings exer a 44 Recording SeEttiNg Sannes an A E da 44 Borsa 45 Pier A O A Ac 45 FISHEYE pe 46 Motion Detection Settings ssssssssssssssssmI mene 46 Database Gettings e eme messes 46 Database Resizing ene eme essen nens 48 Image Quality EE 49 Event Notification ion a ie 49 OUTPUTS naei A A id 49 PTZ Present Position PTZ Cameras Only see 49 www milestonesys com Page 5 Contents Milestone XProt
250. ource Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Microphone Settings Window The Microphone Settings window lets you change basic settings for a microphone You access the Microphone Settings window from the Administrator window see page 30 Select a microphone in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Settings button e Device name Displays the name of the microphone If required you are able to overwrite the existing audio microphone name with a new one e Enabled Lets you enable disable use of the microphone o Tip You can also enable disable an audio source in the Administrator window Right click the required audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then select Disable or Enable from the menu that appears Note On some devices a microphone can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If a microphone on a device does not work after enabling it in the Administrator application you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to the microphone being disabled on the device itself Speaker Settings Window The Speaker Settings window lets you change basic settings for a speaker You access the Speaker Settings window from the Administrator window see page 30 Selecti a speaker in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Settings button e Device nam
251. p in the same way as a camera For more information about using I O devices see Using Dedicated I O Devices on page 85 For information about which I O devices are supported refer to the release note Once a device is added in XProtect Enterprise any cameras attached to Device Manager the device are automatically recognized by the software and listed in the BR Back Door 1010633 Administrator window s Device Manager section Wb Camera i gi Meeting Room 10305010 The illustration to the right shows a detail from the Administrator window s Genen Device Manager section two devices have been added the first device has a single camera attached whereas the second device has four cameras attached gt gt aam To Camera 4 To add a device use the following procedure Prerequisites You must have configured IP address password etc on the device itself as described by the manufacturer 1 Open the Administrator window see page 30 2 In the Administrator window click the Add Device button This will start the Device Setup Wizard 3 Onthe first step of the wizard identify the required device either by e Typing the IP address of the device to jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard or e Typing the DNS host name of the device This requires that you select the Use DNS host names box www milestonesys com Page 36 Device Administration Mileston
252. pen the Default Web Site Desctorp Securly HTTP Headers Custom Eners Properties dialog Web Ste ISAF Filters Hone Directory Documents Web Site idertiicaton Dejcnphon Deba Web Ste 5 On the dialog s Web Site tab set the TCP Port number to the number that PDA Server is going iuga EC B Atos to use the default port for the PDA Server is UE 8080 then click OK pra 6 Back in the Internet Information Services dialog FR verify that IIS is running If IIS is not running Enable Logona start IIS by right clicking the Default Web Site gt WIC Extended Log File Format w Properes item then selecting Start Then PDA Server Installation Having configured the IIS port number you are ready to begin installation of the PDA Server itself 1 Onthe server insert the XProtect Enterprise software DVD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install Milestone XProtect PDA Server link Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the PDA Server installation file PDAServerlnstaller required language exe from the location you have saved it to o Tip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security www milestonesys com Page 182 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button 2 Rea
253. ple to the right we have specified that a Add thew Output El siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port should l External output connected to Stars sound for five seconds when triggered N CA Kep output ka 5 1 90 secondi Tip You are able to test the output by clicking the o MN Test Output button Extend cat name Seer When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window see page 86 Lace 4 In the I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing VO Setup x Eeri events e A im e Eene Ol O Recenter Sum T Som AN ze tmd Ai ren AS event Al AMO Emend egen Late ee drm m Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window see page 30 5 Inthe Administrator window see page 30 first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button Milestone XProtect Administrator Y Device Manager Service Mee Rosa Ad Deven R cune Otte Can 0010 Bh nece Schecter Evert Dawra Lopes ver s www milestonesys com Page 119 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 6 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs butt
254. prise 6 5 Administrator s Manual in these extremely rare situations experience that new recordings are not viewable through Smart Clients In that case restarting the Recording Server service will help since it will force the original database to again be used for storing new recordings Archive Setup Window The Archive setup window lets you enable and configure the archiving feature in XProtect Enterprise It also lets you specify where archives should be stored for the cameras Archive setup y trate dr V Cab e nes Time to add Cine A geen in thee bay directory older thun 1 de S Arer Sele hd te Pees d E rod Gen AM Send era on nem mtm e Send 96 on chim emm e t x Mutomat path wacan j To access the Archive setup window click the Archive Setup button in the Administrator window see page 30 tt cameras tor educ the A df a t a marce arces ten prog ns rog an Plmlioenur Ps wore er lees e mb tnm PFFF Archive Setup Window s Fields and Buttons T Cow d Sat d patte o Ceeg The Archive setup window contains the following fields and buttons Field Button Description Enable Select check box to enable the archiving feature Archiving Note Remember to specify for which cameras the archiving feature should be used you do this in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section at the bottom of the window Delete Lets you specify how many days you want to keep a
255. r that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Event Recording Settings section see page 76 www milestonesys com Page 157 Logging Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Event log files should be viewed using the Smart Client see page 175 or the Viewer see page 169 e Smart Client n the Browse tab s Alerts section select the required event then click the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected e Viewer Select the Viewer s Alarm Overview control panel then click the Events button to view the events log Image Server Service Log Files These files log activity on the Image Server service A log file is created for each day the Image Server is used Image Server log files are by default placed in the folder containing the XProtect Enterprise software typically C Program Files Milestone Milestone Surveillance Image Server log files are named according to the structure SLog_YYYYMMDD log e g ISLog_20070615 log Image Server Audit Log Files These files log Remote Client see page 178 and Smart Client see page 175 user activity if audit logging is enabled in the Image Server Administrator see page 139 A log file is created for each day with remote user activity Image Server audit log files are by default placed in a subfolder named ISAuditLog under the folder containing the XProtect Enterprise software typic
256. r Remove Programs window select the Video Device Pack Vx x entry where x X indicates the relevant version number and click the Remove button 3 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the XProtect Video Device Drivers Click OK to remove the XProtect Video Device Drivers Removing the Download Manager The Download Manager see page 152 is removed separately from the XProtect Enterprise software 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 2 In the Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select Milestone XProtect Download Manager 3 Click the Remove button Removing the Viewer You cannot remove the Viewer separately the Viewer is removed as part of the surveillance server software removal see page 186 Removing the Smart Client To remove a Smart Client do the following on the computer on which the Smart Client is installed 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 2 In the Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select Milestone XProtect Smart Client x x where x x refers to the version number 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions Removing the PDA Software To remove the PDA Server and PDA Client software use the following procedures PDA Server Removal Procedure 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or
257. r based configuration interface on the device s IP address For more information refer to the documentation for the device in question Enabled Lists enabled input events for the device You enable an event by selecting it Input in the Available Input Event s list then clicking the gt gt button See Event s description in the following gt gt You enable an event by selecting it in the Available Input Event s list then clicking the gt gt button to open the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events see page 91 in which you specify a name for the input event and any e mail or SMS alerts to be associated with it When you click OK in the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events the selected input event is automatically transferred from Available Input Event s list to the Enabled Input Event s list lt lt Lets you move an input event selected in the Enabled Input Event s list to the Available Input Event s list thus disabling it www milestonesys com Page 90 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Field Button p Edit Lets you edit the settings for an input event selected in the Enabled Input Event s list Add New Event Window for Devices Capable of Handling Several Inputs L d Vere Unt EA x Cra rmm The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events lets
258. r events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only e Acamera starts when an event button is selected in the Smart Client see page 175 a timer event stops the camera after 15 seconds e A camera starts and the lights are switched on when an event button is selected in the Smart Client a timer event stops the camera after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes www milestonesys com Page 97 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual To define a timer event for an event button select the required event button in he Defined Events list then click the Add new event button When you click the Add new event button while an already specified event button is selected in the Defined Events list the New Timer window see page 93 opens allowing you to specify the required timer event O Tip You may specify several timer events under a single event button However you cannot use a timer event under another timer event Editing Event Buttons and Timer Events To edit an event button or a timer event specified under an event button select the required event button or timer event in the Defined Events list then click the Edit selected button If you have selected an event button clicking the Edit selected button will open the Edit Event window for editing event buttons see page 99 If you have selected a timer event
259. r windows see page 30 I O Setup button to open the I O Setup window see page 86 In the I O Setup windows Defined events list click the plus sign next to the required device select the required input or VMD event then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window see page 93 If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Event Button Click the Administrator window s see page 30 Event Buttons button to open the Event Buttons window see page 96 In the Event Buttons window s Defined Events list select the required event button then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window www milestonesys com Page 116 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Generic Event Click the Administrator window s see page 30 Generic Events button to open the Generic Events window see page 100 In the Generic Events window s Defined Events list select the required generic event then click the Add new event the New Timer window button to open In the New Timer window see page 93 the Timer event is started by field will show the name of the selected event or event button Now specify information in the following fields Timer event name Specify a name for the timer event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Timer event
260. ramerate Specify required number of frames in the first field and select required unit per Second per Minute or per Hour from the list When you specify a frame rate the interval between images is automatically calculated and displayed to the right of the frame rate fields Specifically for Cameras Using MPEG Instead of selecting required frame rate you are able to select a Frame Type Select All to record everything that is similar to having the same frame rate for speedup and for recording Select Key frame if you wish only to record key frames and ignore changes between the key frames that means that you typically record one frame per second e Enable speedup XProtect Enterprise is able to increase the frame rate of a camera if motion is detected or if an event occurs Select the check box to enable increased frame rate on motion detection or on an event then specify the required conditions in the following fields e Tip In the Camera Alert Scheduler window see page 71 you can specify periods in which the camera should always speedup o On motion Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected Select this check box to use a higher frame rate when motion is detected Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Speedup settings section The camera will return to the original frame rate two seconds after the last motion is detected o On event Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected
261. ramework 2 0 as well as one or more later versions are present on the server Windows default settings may www milestonesys com Page 17 Requirements and Prerequisites Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual cause a later NET Framework version to be used instead of NET Framework 2 0 To verify change which NET Framework version is used do the following I 2 Click Start and select Control Panel Click Administrative Tools Click Internet Information Services In the Internet Information Services window s left pane locate and right click the Default Web Site item NY Internet Information Services local computer Gl web Sites of Defa Web Ste lt gt Def auk SMTP Virtual Server In the resulting menu select Properties This will open the Default Web Site Properties dialog Select the dialog s ASP NET tab The NET Framework in use will be indicated in the ASP NET version field If required change the ASP NET version to 2 0 50727 Click OK Close the Internet Information Services and Administrative Tools windows if still open PDA Client Operating Microsoft Windows Pocket PC 2003 2003 SE Mobile 5 0 System CPU Intel StrongARM or 10096 compatible RAM Minimum 32 MB Network Ethernet 256 Kbit or higher recommended Graphics Minimum 320 x 200 16 bit colors Adapter Software Microsoft Windows Pocket PC 2003 2003 SE Mobile 5 0 Matrix Monitor Operating Microsoft Windows X
262. rate and export evidence as movie clips in the AVI format and as still images in the J PG format e Database Export Ability to generate and export evidence in database format The Database Export feature is available in the Smart Client only e Sequences Ability to use the Sequences feature for browsing video from a selected camera e Smart Search Ability to use the Smart Client s Smart Search feature with which users are able to search for motion in one or more selected areas of images from the selected camera The Database Export feature is available in the Smart Client only e Audio Ability to listen to recorded audio from the selected camera s microphone s available only if the selected camera has microphone s attached The Audio feature is available in the Smart Client only o Tip Note that some of the features are mutually dependent For example in order have access to PTZ or output features a user must also have access to viewing live video www milestonesys com Page 150 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual and in order to use AVI and JPG export a user must have access to browsing recorded video 6 Repeat as required for other users groups O What if a user is a member of a group which has different rights than the user itself When this is the case for example when the user Paul himself has been given rights to do A and B whereas the Security Staff group of
263. rator s Manual organization is not going to use certain features typically non relevant language versions See Removing Installation files for End User Features on page 189 for more information Virus Scanning If you are using virus scanning software on the XProtect Enterprise server it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data from the Download Manager If allowed in your organization disable virus scanning on all or parts of the XProtect Enterprise server For more information see Virus Scanning Information on page 162 www milestonesys com Page 156 Download Manager Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Logging Various types of log files can be generated by XProtect Enterprise Most log files generated by XProtect Enterprise use a shared structure complying with the W3C Extended Log File Format Each log file consists of a header and a number of log lines e The header outlines the information contained in the log lines e The log lines consist of two main parts the log information itself and an encrypted part The encrypted part makes it possible through decryption and comparison to assert that a log file has not been tampered with Administrator Application Log Files These files log activity in the Administrator application A log file is created for each day the Administrator is used Administrator log files are by default placed in the
264. rces on scanning all the data which is being archived This may affect system performance negatively Also virus scanning software may temporarily lock each file it scans which may further impact system performance negatively e Likewise virus scanning software on the XProtect Enterprise server is likely to use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data used by the Download Manager If allowed in your organization you should therefore disable any virus scanning of affected areas such as camera databases etc on the XProtect Enterprise server as well as on any archiving destinations www milestonesys com Page 162 Virus Scanning Information Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Protecting Databases from Corruption In the Administrator application s Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 you are able to select which action to take if a camera database becomes corrupted The actions include several database repair options While being able to select such actions is highly valuable it is of course even better to take steps to ensure that your camera databases do not become corrupted Power Outages Use a UPS The single biggest reason for corrupt databases is the surveillance system server being shut down abruptly without files being saved and without the operating system being closed down properly This may happen due to power outages due to somebody accidentally p
265. rchived recordings for databases in Archived recordings older than the specified number of days will the backup automatically be deleted In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera directory Name window see page 43 you can overwrite this setting for a specific older than camera Automatically Note You can only change this option if the Automatic path selection check delete old box see below is also selected If the Automatic path selection check box is archives if not selected automatic deletion of old archives will always be active space is needed If you select this check box the oldest archives will automatically be deleted until there is enough space when new recordings are moved to the archives If you do not select this check box and the archives are full your recordings will remain in the local database When the local database runs out of space the oldest recordings will be deleted Send email Select check box if XProtect Enterprise should send an e mail alert if on archive archiving fails for example because the disk is full error www milestonesys com Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must Page 130 Archiving Field Button Send SMS on archive error Automatic path selection Daily archiving times Time to add Add Delete Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply www milestonesys com Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 A
266. rectly set up on the Image Server and that the user account provides access to the required cameras www milestonesys com Page 185 Access Clients Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Removal Removing the Entire What Will Happen to Surveillance System Recordings when I To remove the entire XProtect Enterprise Remove the Surveillance surveillance system i e the surveillance Software server software and related installation files the video device drivers the Download Manager the Viewer and the Smart Client from your server do the following Your recordings will not be removed they will remain on the server even after the server software has been removed Likewise the XProtect Enterprise configuration file will remain on the server this allows you to reuse your configuration if you later install XProtect Enterprise again 1 Shut down all XProtect Enterprise components 2 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs 3 In the Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select the Milestone XProtect Enterprise system entry not the Milestone XProtect Enterprise entry and click the Change Remove button 4 The setup wizard appears click the Next button then the Remove button 5 Select Remove entire surveillance system then click Next and complete the wizard s remaining steps o Tip If you have used the PDA Client PD
267. red device type from list XProtect Enterprise is able to automatically detect device type as well as serial number provided the IP address hostname and password of the device have been specified in the IP address DNS Host Name and Root Password fields Simply click the Detect Device button to auto detect device type and serial number Click button to auto detect device type and serial number Note Use of the auto detect feature requires that the IP address and password of the device have been specified in the IP address and Root Password fields Name used to identify the device To enable easy identification of devices it is often a good idea to use a device name that refers to the physical area covered by the cameras attached to the device examples Reception Area Car Park B Note Device names must be unique you cannot use the same name for several devices www milestonesys com Page 38 Device Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Button Camera Settings Device Serial Number Device License Key Enable Fisheye Fisheye License Key Opens the Camera Settings for Device Name window see page 40 in which you are able to specify a number of settings for cameras attached to the device including e Port through which PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras are controlled e Camera names types and ports Note The number of settings available in the Camera Settings for Devi
268. res Serge Arce oap hagas OL Evert Po Teasa JO Cri This will open the I O Setup window see page 86 2 Inthe I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connected then click the Add new output event button WO Setup Denm erat Are AL emnt A AMD E ord Maten Cus deum This will open the Add New Output window see page 94 3 In the Add New Output window the External output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields e Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that www milestonesys com Page 118 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual case simply select Output 1 e Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information e External output name Specify a name for the output The name will appear on the list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp V In the exam
269. riod On Event If using On Event remember to specify required start and stop events in the Start event and Stop event lists Good to Know when You Set Patrolling Periods Select the required patrol scheme from the Patrol scheme list located below the calendar section then drag to select the required period in the calendar The Patrol scheme list is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up When you set a Patrolling period you may be able to select between several patrol schemes This will depend upon how many patrol schemes have been set up in the Setup PTZ Patrolling window see page 60 If you set patrolling periods with different patrol schemes immediately following each other in time changes between patrolling schemes will be indicated by a thin vertical line see also Colored Bars in the following Colored Bars The calendar uses colored bars to indicate active periods for each option Online E mail SMS etc e Inthe Online bar active periods are indicated in either pink or yellow o Pink e indicates that the selected camera is continuously transferring video to the XProtect Enterprise software o Yellow indicates that the selected camera transfers video to the XProtect Enterprise software when a specified event occurs e In the Speedup bar active periods are indicated by olive green 9 e Inthe E mail bar active periods are indicated in blue e
270. rol scheme To copy an existing patrol scheme select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol scheme list and click the Copy button This will add a copy of the selected patrol scheme to the list The copy will initially be named Copy of Patrol Scheme Name To change the name to a name of your choice select the Copy of Patrol Scheme Name listing and click the Rename button Renaming an Existing Patrol Scheme To change the name of an existing patrol scheme select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol scheme list and click the Rename button Removing an Existing Patrol Scheme To remove an existing patrol scheme select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol scheme list and click the Remove button Note The selected patrol scheme will be removed from the list without further warning Selecting Preset Positions to Be Used for a PTZ Patrol Scheme Having selected a patrolling scheme in the Patrol scheme list you are able to specify which of the PTZ camera s preset positions should be used for the selected patrolling scheme 1 In the Preset Positions list select the names of the preset positions you want to use A preset position can be used more than once in a patrol scheme for example if the preset position covers an especially important location 6 Tip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting from the Preset Positions list you are able to select several or all of list s preset positio
271. rprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Add new output event Add VMD Event Motion Detection only see page 88 in which you define the input event and any e mail or SMS alerts to be associated with it If you have already defined an input event on a device capable of handling one input event only the Add new event button will not be available when the device is selected in the Defined events list However if you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined events list and select the defined input event the Add new event button becomes available for defining timer events see Timer Events in the following Devices Capable of Handling Several Input Events If the device is capable of handling more than one input event the button will open the Multiple Input Events window see page 90 in which you define which of the device s possible input events should be enabled and whether any alerts should be associated with enabled input events Timer Events When you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined events list and select a defined input event the Add new event button becomes available for defining timer events When clicked the button will open the New Timer window see page 93 in which you are able to specify the settings for timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or m
272. rs Smart Clients see page 175 If a Smart Client is used distribution of the Matrix triggered live video takes place slightly differently Select check box if the Matrix recipient in question is a Smart Client Removes any content in the Name Address Port Password and Smart Client fields Available only if you have edited the properties of an existing Matrix recipient Updates the properties of the selected Matrix recipient with the changes made during editing Available only if you have added properties of a new Matrix recipient in the Name Address Port Password and possibly Smart Client fields Adds the new Matrix recipient to the list www milestonesys com Page 136 Matrix Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m e Automatic Matrix Display on Events There are two ways in which Matrix triggered video c can appear in a Matrix recipient ii aaa x Config Evert e Another user wants to share important Y z video and sends it to the required Matrix perii Door West Wing Comma b recipient from a Smart Client or from a gt Back Door West Wing Camera b The Event tab is used for configuring the automatic Y Moser on Back Doce East Wing Camera a kt Connect gt Back Door Est Wing Comes a Y Moron on Stars Camera c custom made web page Video is sent to the required Matrix recipient 5 be Disconnect then connect automatically when a predefined event s Stars Comore
273. rt Client see page 175 will automatically start up and log in with the selected authentication method each time Windows is started for Basic authentication and Windows authentication this will require that Remember password is selected Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature Define User Rights Window The Image Server s Define User Rights window lets you define access rights for access client users You access the Define User Rights window by clicking the User Access button in the Image Server Administrator window see page 139 The button is only available if you have selected the Image Server Administrator window s Restrict user access option button www milestonesys com Page 148 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Prerequisites Before you define user rights you should define users You do this by clicking the Image Server Administrator window s User Setup button To define access rights for a particular user do the following in 7 the Define User Rights window zi z 1 Inthe User list select the required user or if groups peria P t amp Suse of users have been imported through Active x Bas eran Directory group see page 144 2 Inthe Global User Rights section select the pau user s group s global i e non camera specific rights View Live Ability to view the Live tab in the Remote Client Smart Client If a user group does not have this r
274. rver as well as on each of the slave servers e Outside Access has been enabled on all involved servers and ports mapped accordingly in the routers or firewalls used if the slave servers are to be accessed from the internet Removing a Slave Server To remove a slave server from the Slave Administration window s list of slave servers select the slave server in the list and click the Delete Slave button End User Documentation For end user documentation about how to configure and use the Remote Client and Smart Client see the separate manuals Milestone XProtect Remote Client User s Manual and Milestone XProtect Smart Client User s Manual The manuals are available on the XProtect Enterprise software DVD as well as on www milestonesys com www milestonesys com Page 151 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Download Manager The Download Manager lets you manage which XProtect Enterprise related features your organization s users will be able to access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server You access the Download Manager from Windows Start menu Select All Programs gt Milestone XProtect Download Manager gt Download Manager Examples of user accessible features e The Smart Client see page 175 With a regular Internet Explorer browser users connect to the surveillance server where they are presented with a welcome page From the welcome page users
275. rver service Pausing the service is necessary in order to access some features for example configuration of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras IMPORTANT While the service is paused no video or audio will be recorded Scheduler Opens the Camera Alert Scheduler window see page 71 in which you specify online periods for each camera You are also able to specify if cameras should go online when specific events occur e g when a door is opened and if e mail or sound alerts should be used if motion is detected during specific periods of time e g during working hours If using PTZ cameras with patrolling you are furthermore able to specify if certain patrol schemes should be used during specific periods of time D Tip By default all cameras are online at all times You will only need to modify scheduler settings if you require cameras to be online only at specific times or events or if you want to use specific alerts or PTZ patrol schemes www milestonesys com Page 32 Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual General Settings Archive Setup Import DLKs Matrix Transact Add Device Edit Device Remove Device Settings Opens the General Settings window see page 76 in which you are able to specify a number of settings related to e Administrator password e User rights for the Administrator application e Milestone XProtect Central settings if u
276. s Monitor application from a Smart Client see page 175 or from a custom made web page to the required Matrix recipient e The video is sent to the required Matrix recipient automatically when a predefined event occurs for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened or when the surveillance system detects motion in the video from a camera As part of the video exchange between computers on the XProtect Enterprise Matrix system other computers exactly which computers are defined as part of the Matrix configuration are able to send commands to Matrix recipients The commands typically tell the Matrix recipient to connect to or disconnect video feeds from a particular cameras Where can I find more information about the Matrix Monitor Refer to the Matrix Monitor User s Manual available on the XProtect Enterprise software DVD as well as from www milestonesys com www milestonesys com Page 171 Matrix Monitor Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Access Clients Access Client Overview Remote users can access an XProtect Enterprise surveillance system in different ways e With a Remote Client see page 178 run straight from server good selection of standard features Pom Se Example of Remote Client e With a Smart Client see page 175 installed locally very feature rich based on the NET platform and thus highly flexible for future integration of plugins etc LV
277. s 16 Surveillance System Server 16 Smart el nm 16 Remote Client suicidas carte dn rr tr e Eg tn Scans Ra t RR Re e aca chads 17 PDA ZEIEN SEA 17 PDA eld E 18 Matrix lei IT 18 Important Port Numbers oooococoncnroonorancncannnrananrannnrannnrnnnnrananrnnanrananennas 19 Time Server Recommended ococccoococoncncnnrnconcncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncnnrncananes 20 ADMINISTRATORS GETTING STARTED CHECKLIST 21 INSTALLATION ui ic 24 Microsoft Windows Vista Information e eene nennen 24 Installing the Server Software eeeseseeeeee seen nnne nan nan 24 Upgrading from a Previous Version cmcoococooroconcncnnnncanancannncanancananeanans 25 USING THE BUILT IN HELP SYSTEM nne 28 THE ADMINISTRATOR APPLICATION EE KE EEN 30 Administrator Login Window KENE EN KREE ENEE ENEE E nenne anneau ain nnn 30 Administrator Windouw EEN KN ENEE ER KENNEN ENEE E REENEN unma ENER ENER uuu au uan 30 www milestonesys com Page 4 Contents Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Device Manager Section 30 Adding Devices eee eee E a ee eee naan i 31 Editing Settings for Devices ccc cece eee ee cece e eee eee teeta menn 31 Editing Settings for Cameras cce cece eee cece eee eee ee ease eee teen eenaes 31 Renaming Cameras civic cere ex SEENEN eth erent e OR RI ed ENNEN ue dx bee i dm 31 Assigning Sh
278. s on the camera video encoder itself l First use the controls in the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s PTZ View section to move the PTZ camera to the required position www milestonesys com Page 56 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 2 Having moved the PTZ camera to the required position select an undefined item may be labeled Undefined or with a position number in the Preset Positions section s list of preset position names and click the Set Position button to define a name for the preset position For detailed information about the functionality of PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window such as the ability to test your preset positions the ability to combine preset positions with events or the ability to use preset positions in PTZ patrolling schemes see Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s sections in the following You are able to define up to 50 preset positions Each of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s sections are described in the following PTZ View Section The PTZ View section lets you control the PTZ camera and watch the PTZ camera s movements You use this section to move the PTZ camera to the positions you then define as presets positions in the Preset Positions section To move the PTZ camera simply click the required position in the preview picture The PTZ View
279. se server is running out of disk space and e the archiving drive is different from the camera database drive and e archiving has not taken place within the last hour archiving will automatically begin in an attempt to free up disk space This will happen regardless of any archiving schedules but will of course only apply for cameras for which archiving has been enabled in the Archive Setup window see page 130 The server is considered to be running out of disk space if e there is less than 10 disk space left and the available disk space goes below 30 GB plus 1 5 GB per camera Se or e the available disk space goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera example with ten cameras the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space went below 350 MB 150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of disk space just because they have less than 10 disk space left On the archiving drive XProtect Enterprise automatically checks that the space required for data from a camera to be archived plus 1 GB of free disk space per camera is available If not the archive drive s oldest data from the camera in question will be deleted until there is sufficient free space for the new data to be archived IMPORTANT You will lose the archive data being deleted Same Drive Automatic Moving or Deletion of Archives if
280. section select the device then click the Edit device button to open the Edit device settings window see page 38 Editing Settings for Cameras To edit the settings for a camera listed in the Device Manager section click the plus sign next to the device to which the camera is attached select the required camera then click the Settings button to e Camera d open the Camera Settings for Device name Camera Name window see page 43 R Back Door East Wing 10 10 69 3 Renaming Cameras To rename a camera right click the camera name in question then select 3 Stars 1010691 Edit from the menu that appears This will open the Camera Name and Camel cca Number window see page 64 in which you are able to overwrite the eR s existing camera name with a new one Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Cameras Users of the Smart Client see page 175 can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such keyboard shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera To assign a shortcut number to a camera right click the camera name in R Stars 1010691 question then select Edit from the menu that appears This will open the Ub Comet cuan Camera Name and Number window see page 64 in which you are able Edit ly to specify a shortcut number to be used with the camera Note Camera shortcut
281. section also features sliders allowing you to move the PTZ camera along each of its axes the X axis allowing you to pan left right the Y axis allowing you to tilt the camera up down and the Z axis enabling you to zoom in and out the camera will zoom in when you move the slider towards Tele and zoom out when you move the slider towards Wide As an alternative to clicking the required position in the preview or using the sliders you can use the PTZ camera navigation buttons Moves the PTZ camera up and to the left Moves the PTZ camera up Moves the PTZ camera up and to the right Moves the PTZ camera to the left Moves the PTZ camera to its home position Moves the PTZ camera to the right Moves the PTZ camera down and to the left Moves the PTZ camera down Moves the PTZ camera down and to the right Zoom out one zoom level per click 30000 Zoom in one zoom level per click www milestonesys com Page 57 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Preset Position Section Having specified a camera position in the PTZ View section you define the required position as a preset in the Preset Positions section Button Description Check Box Use preset Available only for cameras supporting this feature Check box to use preset positions positions defined on the camera or video encoder device Using preset positions from from the camera or video encoder device will clear any preset positi
282. sername Field available only when Server requires login is selected Type the user name required for using the SMTP server e Password Field available only when Server requires login is selected Type the password required for using the SMTP server Specifying Default Subject and Message Texts e Subject text Specify required subject text for e mail alerts e Message text Specify required message text for e mail alerts Note that camera information as well as date and time information is automatically included in e mail alerts Note If e mail alerts are enabled for the Viewer the content you specify in the Subject text and Message text fields will appear as default values in the Viewer s dialog for sending evidence via e mail Users will be able to overwrite these default values Specifying Image and Interval Options You are able to specify whether e mail alerts should include images and how much time should pass between alerts per camera e Include Image Select check box to include images in e mail alerts When selected a JPG image from the time the triggering event occurred will be attached to each alert e mail www milestonesys com Page 81 General Settings Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e Time btw motion related mails minutes Specify required minimum time in minutes to pass between the sending of each e mail alert per camera Note that this interval only applies for e mail alerts generated
283. shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Camera shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera must not contain any letters or special characters and must be no longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers A 3 1234567809 Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in the Smart Client In other applications such as the Remote Client the camera shortcuts cannot be used e Tip You can also assign shortcut numbers to cameras in the Camera Name and Number window see page 64 a Tip More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is available in the separate Smart Client documentation Lets you select whether the camera on the selected camera channel is Fixed or Moveable e Fixed Camera mounted in a fixed position e Moveable PTZ camera www milestonesys com Page 41 Device Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Device Port Available only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field Lets you select which control port on the video encoder should be used for controlling PTZ functionality on the camera Port Available only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field Address Lets you specify port address of the camera The port address would normally be 0 or 1 If using daisy chained PTZ cameras the port address will identify each of them and you should verify your s
284. sing the Milestone XProtect Central centralized monitoring solution in connection with XProtect Enterprise e PTZ patrolling pause time out if using PTZ cameras with patrolling e E mail settings for alerts sent via e mail e SMS settings for alerts sent via SMS e Log file settings e Other advanced settings Opens the Archive setup window see page 130 in which you specify XProtect Enterprise s archiving settings Archiving lets you keep recordings for as long as required limited only be the available hardware storage capacity Lets you import all required Device License Keys DLKs in one go thus avoiding the need to specify each DLK manually when adding devices See also How to Import Device License Keys on page 35 Lets you access Matrix configuration see page 135 Matrix is an integrated product for forcing video from any camera to any monitor on a network operating with XProtect Enterprise Note The Transact button is not functional If Milestone XProtect Transact add on product for handling loss prevention through video evidence combined with time linked POS or ATM transaction data is installed on the server use Windows Start menu or the Transact Administrator desktop shortcut to access the Transact Administrator Use with Milestone XProtect Transact versions earlier than 2 1 is not supported Starts the Device Setup Wizard which guides you through the process of adding a new device See also How to Add a Device o
285. sing the following buttons to adjust the ellipse EXA Description R Decreases the radius of the fisheye view field The ellipse s horizontal X and vertical Y radiuses are changed at the same time keeping the aspect ratio R Increases the radius of the fisheye view field The ellipse s horizontal X and vertical Y radiuses are changed at the same time keeping the aspect ratio Rx Decreases the horizontal X radius of the ellipse Rx Increases the horizontal X radius of the ellipse Ry Decreases the vertical Y radius of the ellipse Ry Increases the vertical Y radius of the ellipse X Moves the ellipse to the left X Moves the ellipse to the right Y Moves the ellipse up Y Moves the ellipse down Previewing the Fisheye View You are able to toggle between previewing the original elliptic view as well as the flattened rectangular view resulting from applying the fisheye algorithm according to your specified values To toggle between the two different types of preview click the Toggle Preview button When previewing the fisheye rendered view the following navigation buttons become available for moving around within the preview image area www milestonesys com Page 63 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Moves the fisheye rendered view up and to the left Moves the fisheye rendered view up Moves the fisheye rendered view up and to the right Moves the fis
286. st Output button Eed cura mamo Be When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window see page 86 Geen 4 In the I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon H in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing VO Setup LX dM tm tmd edd rore AI tmd Add VM Eom Mit Cem te Aber m Click OK to close the I O setup window see page 86 and return to the Administrator www milestonesys com Page 122 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual window see page 30 5 Inthe Administrator window see page 30 first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button Device Manager Y 052100020 Bh Comcast tice Cam LS Receptan 93 10 Schede Le Y Snot e erg egen Aechwe Late tp D Tiasa Le This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 6 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs button J Come eem rm ware a mm n Papeete ae w bett pm Game SED secondi btw megas 7 Same m eor dame m mma fec dre ttn Ad ae ane LI e mija Derme t cdt megas NL I fet ege pwe x Men i ont mage n Cat bae r Ms F oman Leesee KE T One Coruna Monon dt sat F der Demetr wie prejpust socia dra on utusdevent tie t
287. stem administrator having to set up anything a tee Toe x i v Arabic v Smart Client Installer 3 v 35b Engish V Remote Client The default configuration provides users with access to two features A Smart Client and a Remote Client in language versions matching the language version of your XProtect Enterprise system 3 735 C Engish Danish Dutch v French German Italian v Japanese Polish Russian v Simplified Chinese v Spanish The Download Manager s configuration is represented in a tree structure With an English version of XProtect Enterprise the tree would be structured as illustrated to the right Download Manager s Tree Structure gt ie amp we ie ie ie ie ie ie The first level of the tree structure 1 in the example illustration simply indicates that you are working with an XProtect Enterprise system The second level 2 refers to the languages in which the welcome page is available In the example the welcome page is available in a dozen languages English Arabic Danish Dutch French etc www milestonesys com Page 153 Download Manager Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual The third level 3 refers to the features which are or can be made available to users In the example these features are limited to the Smart Client and the Remote Client The fourth level 4 refers to particular versions of each feature such as version 3 5 which ar
288. t Open Recording Server Log File To view the Image Server log file do the following 1 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 Inthe menu that appears select Open Image Server Log File For more information about log files see page 157 Accessing the Built in Help System 1 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 In the menu that appears select Help www milestonesys com Page 69 Recording Server Service Management Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Viewing Information about Your XProtect Enterprise Version 1 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 Inthe menu that appears select About Knowing the version number can be useful in case you require support from your Milestone vendor Exiting the Recording Server Manager 1 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon 2 Inthe menu that appears select Exit Recording Server Manager ae Tip To re open the Recording Server Manager go to Windows start menu and select All Programs gt Startup gt Milestone XProtect Enterprise Recording Server Manager Service Manager Window The Service Manager window lets you pause resume the Milestone Recording Server service Pausing the service is necessary in order to access some features such as configuration of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras You access the Service Manager window by clicking the Service Manager button in
289. t Protocol a protocol i e standard specifying the format and addressing scheme used for sending data packets across networks IP is often combined with another protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol The combination known as TCP IP allows data packets to be sent back and forth between two points on a network for longer periods of time and is used when connecting computers and other devices on the internet IP Address Internet Protocol address the identifier for a computer or device on a network Used by the TCP IP protocol for routing data traffic to the intended destination An IP address consists of four numbers each between 0 and 256 separated by full stops example 192 168 212 2 IPIX A technology that allows creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images K Keyframe Used in the MPEG standard for digital video compression a keyframe is a single frame stored at specified intervals The keyframe records the entire view of the camera whereas the www milestonesys com Page 191 Glossary Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual following frames record only the pixels that change This helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG files MAC Address Media Access Control address a 12 character hexadecimal number uniquely identifying each device on a network Matrix Feature integrated into XProtect Enterprise enabling control of live camera views on remote computers for distributed viewing Once configur
290. t occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window see page 82 When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window see page 86 4 Inthe I O Setup window your newly defined event is now listed you may have to click the expand icon 1 in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing VO Setup Deben events m ei a cam Add rame AI emt Aa AMD E ord Main Ct deban Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window see page 30 For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on XProtect Enterprise How to Add an Event Button Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in XProtect Enterprise such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously www milestonesys com Page 108 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output on page 84 In most cases events occur and actions are triggered without the need for human intervention by XProtect Enterprise users System administrators define the
291. t port is port 21 Alert Port Lets you specify port number to use for handling event based alerts including generic events see page 100 Default port is port 1234 SMTP Port Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information from the device to the surveillance system via SMTP Default port is port 25 www milestonesys com Page 95 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m e Polling For a small number of devices primarily O devices see Using Dedicated I O Frequency Devices on page 85 it is necessary for the surveillance system to regularly 1 10 sec check the state of the devices input ports in order to detect whether input has been received Such state checking at regular intervals is called polling The Polling Frequency field lets you specify the interval between state checks Interval is specified in tenths of a second Default value is 10 tenths of a second i e one second For 1 0 devices it is highly recommended that the polling frequency is set to the lowest possible value one tenth of a second between state checks For information about which devices require polling see the release note Event Buttons What Is an Event Button Event buttons lets users manually trigger events from the Smart Client see page 175 In the Smart Client event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list You ar
292. t substring field to the Event message include field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis See also the description of the Event substring and Event message includes fields Lets you add a start parenthesis character to the Event message include field Parentheses can be used to ensure that related terms are processed together as a logical unit in other words they can be used to force a certain processing order in the analysis Example User001 OR Door053 AND Sunday In the example the two terms inside the parenthesis will be processed first then the result will be combined with the last part of the string In other words the system will first look for any packages containing either of the terms User001 or Door053 then it will take the results and run through them in order to see which packages also contain the term Sunday Lets you add an end parenthesis character to the Event message include field Lets you add an AND operator to the Event message include field With an AND operator you specify that the terms on both sides of the AND operator must be present Example User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday In the example the term User001 as well as the term Door053 as well as the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met It is not enough for only one or two of the terms to be present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with AND the fewer results you will retrieve
293. tall licensed Version option and specify your user name organization and Software License Code SLC printed on your Product License Sheet When ready click Next www milestonesys com Page 24 Installation Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 7 Click the Install button to begin the software installation During the process all the necessary components will be installed one after the other e XProtect Enterprise s Administrator window may appear on your screen during installation When this is the case the window will automatically close again after a short while e Ifa Status Information window appears on your screen during installation click its OK button the window simply provides a summary of your installation 8 Click Finish on the last step to complete the installation When installation is complete you can begin configuring your XProtect Enterprise solution Double click the Administrator desktop shortcut or select Start gt All Programs gt Milestone XProtect Enterprise gt Administrator to open the Administrator window o Tip If you want to make additional language versions of the Smart Client and Remote Client such as Spanish French or Japanese versions available to your organization s users you can quickly do this once you have installed XProtect Enterprise See more in the description of the Download Manager on page 152 Upgrading from a Previous Version Upgrading XProtect Enterpr
294. ted default a schedule specifying that the camera is always online i e transferring video to XProtect Enterprise will automatically be created in the Camera Alert Scheduler window see page 71 The automatically created schedule can be edited manually at any time If not selected no schedule will automatically be created meaning that the Page 78 General Settings Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Check Box Description camera will not automatically be transferring video to XProtect Enterprise When required schedules can be added manually in the Camera Alert Scheduler window see page 71 Email Settings Clicking the Email Settings button opens the E Mail setup window see page 80 in which you enable and configure the use of e mail alerts Sms Settings Clicking the Sms Settings button opens the SMS settings window see page 82 in which you enable and configure the use of SMS mobile phone text message alerts Note Use of the SMS alert feature requires that an external Siemens TC 35 GSM modem has been attached to a serial port on the computer running the XProtect Enterprise software Change Password Window The Change Password window lets you change the administrator password for your XProtect Enterprise solution To access the Change Password window click the Change Password button in the General Settings window see page 76 How to Change the Administrator Password 1 Specify
295. ted event button is clicked the selected output will be triggered You are able to associate an event or an event button with more than one output Simply repeat the process for each required output To remove an output from the Selected Outputs list simply select the required output and click the button located below the Selected Outputs list www milestonesys com Page 105 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m e Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window In the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name Sat beten fer Mel Camere 1 ng window you are able to associate a camera with particular Hoss Meran external outputs defined in the I O Setup window see page re E ES 86 for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of 1 T e lights The associated outputs can be triggered automatically 1o e when motion is detected as well as manually through output A gece buttons available in the Remote Client see page 178 and Smart s Client see page 175 Lan You access the Output Settings for Device Name Camera ma tn eet Do ee Name window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 43 by clicking the Outputs button Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion Note Use of features in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window requires that output has been defined in the I O Setup window
296. tem NY Internet Information Services BB local computer Y Web Sites wf Defaut Web Ste gt Def auk SMTP Virtual Server In the resulting menu select Properties This will open the Default Web Site Properties dialog Select the dialog s ASP NET tab The NET Framework version in use will be indicated in the ASP NET version field If required change the ASP NET version to 2 0 50727 Click OK Close the Internet Information Services and Administrative Tools windows if still open NET Framework Registration When IIS and NET Framework are installed you must register NET Framework in the IIS 1 2 3 In Windows Start menu select Run In the Open field type C WINDOWS Framework v2 0 50727 aspnet_regiis exe i Note that if you also have later NET versions installed you may have to type a slightly different path C WINDOWS Microsoft NET Framework v2 0 50727 aspnet_regiis exe i Note In both cases make sure you include the i parameter Click OK to register the NET Framework in IIS Allowing Use of NET Framework Windows 2003 Only When NET Framework is installed you must allow use of NET Framework by doing the following 1 2 5 Click Start and select Control Panel Click Administrative Tools Click Internet Information Services In the Internet Information Services Manager s left pane select the Web Service Extensions item On the Extended tab in the Internet Informati
297. tem make sure you click the No button when the warning message asks you if you really want to terminate the process Hard Disk Failures Protect Your Drives Hard disk drives are mechanical devices and as such they are vulnerable to external factors The following are examples of external factors which may damage hard disk drives and lead to corrupt camera databases e Vibration make sure the surveillance system server and its surroundings are stable e Strong heat make sure the server has adequate ventilation www milestonesys com Page 163 Protecting Databases from Corruption Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual e Strong magnetic fields avoid e Power outages make sure you use a UPS see more information in the previous e Static electricity make sure you ground yourself if you are going to handle a hard disk drive e Fire water etc avoid www milestonesys com Page 164 Protecting Databases from Corruption Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Using 3 GB Operating System Virtual Memory Microsoft Windows 32 bit operating systems can address 4 GB of virtual memory The operating system kernel reserves 2 GB for itself and each individual running process is allowed to address another 2 GB This is Windows default setting and for the vast majority of XProtect Enterprise installations it works fine In XProtect Enterprise 6 5d or newer the main components of the server
298. tem Virtual Memor 165 Operating System Minimum Requirements rr rnr rr meses 16 OR Boolean Operator cocrsarctaa nd dar 103 le EE 53 84 86 94 105 106 Output Lg LEE 54 106 Output Buttons HOW to Add amorosa Ee 118 Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window 0oocccccccccncnncnnanncancnnrnn n 53 106 Output Associating With Events eege eg NEE rro mer lp ea a os 105 Output How to Add Manually Triggered 0 cece cee III nnn 118 Output How to Add Motion Triggered ccc mme emen een 121 Output Manually Triggered s etre en eet eee ee pax e ke i e e den EES ee AER 54 118 Output Motion Trioggered mmm emen meme messis ene essen nnn 54 121 Outside Access Image Server ssessssssssrerserarsrrtrstrtrt rrari rrer emen eene esee eme esse ene ese nnn 139 p Pan TIE ZOOM E IT 40 56 60 Pan Tilt Zoom Absolute and Relative Posltioning menm 56 NEE 30 37 40 76 79 Nie e E 60 Patrol surta an A ADO 60 Patrolling on Moti n DetectiON ciar a ad ei 62 Patrolling Resuming after Interruption m mnes enses eene nnn 77 Patrolling SCNEQUING iveco va a as 72 74 Pausing the Recording Server Service 70 b We m EUER 173 179 PDA SerVer EEN 173 180 Polling Erequericy orco EE AE NES rex ink Ri RIDERE TEFAL UN UP EE RAN QUEE PN NQUES aad 96 Ne legt ln TEEN 19 136 139 140 www milestonesys com Page 201 Index Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Positioning Absolute and Re
299. tem with a very wide range of external sources for example access control systems alarm systems etc Events based on the analysis of received TCP and or UDP packets Gant al Gl are called generic events XProtect Enterprise listens for generic Detre en events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window Seren see page 95 default is port 1234 The Generic Events window lets you manage such events You access the Generic Events window by clicking the Generic Events button in the Administrator window see page 30 EE Recre selecta Generic Events Window s Events List and Buttons l l The Generic Events window features a Defined events list in which defined TCP and or UDP based events are listed as well a number of buttons used when configuring the events L Button Description Add new Lets you define new events The type of event you are able to define is event determined by what you have selected in the Defined events list e When nothing is selected or you have selected the list s Generic item clicking the Add new event button will open the Add New Event window for specifying generic events see page 101 in which you are able to specify the rules and notification settings for individual TCP and or UDP based events e When an existing event is selected in the list clicking the Add new event button will open the New Timer window see page 93 in which you are abl
300. terprise detecting motion on a particular camera VMD simply means Video Motion Detection Once the VMD event is defined you will be able to select it when further configuring XProtect Enterprise 6 Tip If you are specifically looking for information about how to configure motion detection triggered activation of an output device only such as a siren a strobe light etc see How to Add a Motion Triggered Output on page 121 Note n addition to XProtect Enterprise s motion detection some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address Events based on motion detected on a device itself are not VMD Events they are input events since they are based on input from the device Note Your motion detection settings for the camera in question will entirely determine when motion is detected and thus when the VMD event will occur See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window page 50 for more information Also note that in order not to generate an excessively high number of VMD events during periods with lots of motion a VMD event cannot occur more frequently than every five seconds www milestonesys com Page 110 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual To add a VMD event do the following 1 In the Administrator window see page 30 cli
301. the Administrator window see page 30 Pausing the Milestone Recording Server EI E Se rvi ce Recording Server running Pausa To pause the Milestone Recording Server service click the Pause button IMPORTANT While the Milestone Recording Server service is paused no video or audio will be available neither for live viewing nor for recording Resuming the Milestone Recording Server Service Service Manager Kl When the service is paused the Service Manager window closes The next AS time you open it the Pause button will have changed to Resume Simply Resume Cancel click the Resume button to resume the Milestone Recording Server service e Tip The service is automatically resumed when you exit the Administrator application What to Do if the Milestone Recording Server Service is Stopped If the Service Manager window informs you that the recording server is stopped the Milestone Recording Server service has been stopped as opposed to paused outside the Administrator application possibly through the Recording Server Manager see page 68 You are able to start a stopped Milestone Recording Server service through the Recording Server Manager www milestonesys com Page 70 Recording Server Service Management Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Scheduling Camera Alert Scheduler Window The Camera Alert Scheduler window lets you specify when each camera should be online A camera is onlin
302. the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window E Tip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list Setup Notifications on Events Window Note The use of event notifications requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on your XProtect Enterprise system the event does not have to be specified for the particular www milestonesys com Page 54 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual camera You specify events in the I O Setup window see page 86 accessed by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window see page 30 The Setup Notifications on Events window lets you select events for o u triggering event indications for the camera when displayed in RU AEN Remote Client and Smart Client see page 175 be gm LA L A C KE mm You access the Setup Notifications on Events window from the ol Snn CJ Camera settings for Device Name C
303. ths of a second Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information Lets you specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note Output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp V Some camera devices only support output names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Testing the Defined Output When you have defined settings for the output in question you are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button Edit Output Window The Edit Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device You access the Edit Output window by selecting the required output in the I O Setup window see page 86 then clicking the Edit selected button www milestonesys com Page 94 Ln Output 2X3 Mi Zen Coo on Kemp m ss S MM secondi Lee Ltd tend sme n zi en Dapa Cred Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m e Edit Output Window s Fields Field Description External Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the output event output is defined connected to Output Lets you edit which of the device
304. tings oet Nam feet Noted vert nde hoe vert orty Sand nal fw evert occur feed PO 4 thes emt occurs vmi rue sino teet sins When www milesto Event name Specify a name for the event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp V Event Protocol Select which protocol XProtect Enterprise should listen for Any i e TCP as well as UDP TCP only or UDP only XProtect Enterprise listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window see page 95 default is port 1234 Event rule type Select how particular XProtect Enterprise should be when analyzing received data packages Match if the received package must contain only the exact message specified in the Event message include field see description in the following Search if the received package must contain the message specified in the Event message include field but may also have other content Event priority Specify a priority between O lowest priority and 1000 highest priority for the event in case a received data package matches more than one event Event rule string Specify what XProtect Enterprise should look out for when analyzing the data packages then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which is used when analyzing received data packages You are furthermore able to use processing order parentheses and tw
305. tion for Users of memes 24 Winter Summer MIME E 168 X Li lge een TEE 79 XProtect Central pc EE 76 XPFOCECE Ed satan een exei nrbe redd LUE 33 135 171 XProtect Transaction entrer EAR A AA AA ESA EE A 33 www milestonesys com Page 205 Index Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Milestone Systems offices are located across the world For details about office addresses phone and fax numbers visit www milestonesys com www milestonesys com Page 206 Milestone Office Locations
306. ton is clicked Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the XProtect Enterprise release note to verify that input controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only contains the following fields Field Check LES Box External Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input event is sensor defined connected to Sensor Lets you select which of the device s input ports the sensor used for the input connected event is connected to through Event occurs when input goes External event name Lets you select whether input event should be triggered when the signal on the input sensor rises or falls e Low Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is falling e High Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the sensor and device in question Lets you specify a name for the input event Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Some camera devices only support event names of a certain length and or with a
307. ton will open the New Timer window see page 93 If the selected item is an output the button will open the Edit Output window see page 94 Lets you remove an event selected in the Defined events list Note The selected event will be removed without further warning Opens the Advanced window see page 95 in which you are able to specify network settings to be used in connection with event handling which ports to use for FTP alerts and SMTP input output events as well as which polling frequency to use on devices requiring polling Add New Event Window for Devices Capable of Handling One Input Only The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input E Si event only lets you specify the settings for an input event on devices AAA capable of handling one input event only pa ae T You access the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling tee one input event only by selecting the required device and clicking the Bee Add new event button in the I O Setup window see page 86 Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a codec single input event only Some devices are capable of handling several ECA PRA www milestonesys com Page 88 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual input events in which case a different window the Multiple Input Events window see page 90 will open when the Add new event but
308. trol window see page 105 in which you are able to associate specific events with specific output This way you can for example specify that when motion is detected on a camera typically specified as a VMD event a siren should automatically sound output If you want users to be able to manually activate output when operating specific cameras you specify this in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 106 Note Before you specify use of external input and output units on a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the Milestone release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Note If you are using several XProtect Enterprise servers in your surveillance solution setup input and output on a specific device should be defined on one of the servers only Do not define the same input or output on the same device on several servers This applies even for dedicated I O devices see also Using Dedicated I O Devices on page 85 Using Dedicated O Devices In addition to IP video camera devices and IP video encoder devices it is possible to add a number of dedicated I O input output devices to XProtect Enterprise see How to Add a Device on page 36 For information about which I O devices are supported refer to
309. ts For cameras attached to the same device as a microphone and or speakers the microphone and or speaker is automatically selected and cannot be changed Fisheye Note Functionality in the Fisheye section is only available if the use of fisheye technology has been enabled for the device to which the camera is attached For dedicated fisheye cameras the use of fisheye technology is automatically enabled If not dealing with a dedicated fisheye camera you enable use of fisheye technology for a device in the Edit device settings window see page 38 accessed by selecting the required device in the Administrator window s see page 30 Device Manager section then clicking the Administrator window s Edit Device button The Fisheye section contains the following fields and buttons e Enable Fisheye Select check box to enable the use of fisheye a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images through an advanced fish eye lens on the particular camera e Fisheye Settings Opens the Fisheye Camera Configuration window see page 62 in which you configure the camera s fisheye functionality Motion Detection Settings The Motion Detection Settings section contains two buttons for configuring the camera s motion detection e Motion Detection Opens the Adjust Motion Detection window see page 50 in which you are able to specify motion detection sensitivity levels e Exclude Regions Opens the Define Exclus
310. ttings one or more Windows security warnings may appear after you click the link If such security warnings appear accept security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button text depends on your browser version www milestonesys com Page 160 Video Device Drivers Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 3 Select required language and click OK This will open the Video Device Driver Setup Wizard which will guide you through the installation 4 On the wizard s first step click the Next button 5 On the wizard s second step an installation path is automatically suggested Simply click Next to continue 6 On the wizard s third step select Device drivers for Enterprise systems from the menu and click Next 7 The wizard is now ready to install the video device drivers Click the Install button to complete the installation of the video device drivers 8 When ready remember to start any stopped Recording Server service again see page 68 www milestonesys com Page 161 Video Device Drivers Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Virus Scanning Information Virus scanning on the XProtect Enterprise server and computers to which data is archived should if possible be avoided e f you are using virus scanning software on the XProtect Enterprise server or on a computer to which data is archived it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resou
311. tton Se The Add New Event window for specifying generic events is divided into three sections General Event Settings Section Event Name Lets you specify a name for the event Each event must have a unique name Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Fx Event Lets you select which protocol XProtect Enterprise should listen for in order to Protocol detect the event e Any Listen for and analyze packages using TCP as well as UDP protocol e TCP Listen for and analyze packages using TCP protocol only e UDP Listen for and analyze packages using UDP protocol only Which port is used XProtect Enterprise listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window see page 95 default is port 1234 Event rule Lets you select how particular XProtect Enterprise should be when analyzing type received data packages e Match n order for the event to occur the received package must contain exactly the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field and nothing else e Search In order for the event to occur the received package must contain the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field but may also have more content Example If you have specified that the received package should contain the terms User001 and Door053 the event will be www milestonesys com Page 101 Input Ev
312. twork Consult your network administrator if in doubt User and Group Concepts Active Directory uses the concepts of users and groups Users are Active Directory objects representing individuals with a user account Example 8 Adolfo Rodriguez 8 Asif Khan a Karen Otley d Keith Waverley a Wayne Massey Groups are Active Directory objects that can contain several users In this example the Management group contains three users 3 Management Group Q Adolfo Rodriguez a Karen Otley a Wayne Massey www milestonesys com Page 145 Image Server Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Groups can contain any number of users By importing a group into XProtect Enterprise you are able to import all of its members in one go The number of groups may vary from organization to organization depending on the structure and requirements of each organization Note that a user can be a member of more than one group For instance Adolfo Rodriguez from our fictitious example above could easily be a member of the organization s Management group as well as of its Sales group and its Staff Social Club group Each of the two methods is described in the following How to Add a New Basic User To define a new dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication click the User administration window s Add Basic User button specify required user name and password and click O
313. u obtain DLKs as part of the software registration process on the Milestone Systems website www milestonesys com e Click the Software Registration link e Login to the online registration system If you do not yet have a login click the New To The System link and follow the instructions When ready log in using the registered e mail address and password The DLKs will be e mailed to the e mail address specified in your login so it is a good idea to use a single e mail account for all persons who should be able to retrieve DLKs e f you have not yet registered your SLC Software License Code listed on your product license sheet do so by clicking the Add SLC link and completing the SLC registration steps before proceeding e When ready click the link representing the SLC e For each device required on your system click the Add new MAC link and specify the device s MAC address and a description The MAC address is a 12 digit hexadecimal example 0123456789AF referred to as a serial number by some vendors For information about how to find the MAC address for a specific device refer to the manual for the device in question e For video encoder devices specify the number of cameras to be used with the device Note that you are allowed to install only the number of cameras listed on your product license sheet For example a fully used four port video server counts as four cameras www milestonesys com Page 21 Requirements and Pr
314. uch automatically triggered warnings may otherwise inform you that your e mail client is trying to automatically send e mail messages on your behalf To access the E Mail setup window click the Email Settings Lat setup yl button in the General Settings window see page 76 V mata Enable E cual Viewer Enabling E mail Alerts Sender Setting Senda emai adds You enable the use of e mail alerts separately for the Milestone Recording Server see page 68 and if applicable the Viewer Bees server name application see page 169 R Seres request log Note When enabling e mail alerts also consider the e mail alert schedules configured for each camera in the Camera Alert Punt Scheduler window see page 71 Zut Vea e Enable E Mail Recording Server Select check box to enable the use of e mail alerts when the Milestone Recording Server is running E mail alerts will then be sent when the following conditions apply Ge E o the Milestone Recording Server is running ep SI c o motion is detected or an event for which the sending of an e mail alert has been defined occurs o motion is detected within a period of time for which an e mail alert schedule has been defined e Enable E Mail Viewer Select check box to enable the use of e mail alerts in the Viewer application In effect this will display the E Mail Report button in the Viewer s toolbar www milestonesys com Page 80 General Settings Milestone XProtect
315. udience for this Document Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Copyright Trademarks and Important Information Copyright O 2009 Milestone Systems A S Trademarks XProtect is a registered trademark of Milestone Systems A S Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks mentioned in this document are trademarks of their respective owners Disclaimer This document is intended for general information purposes only and due care has been taken in its preparation Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient and nothing herein should be construed as constituting any kind of warranty Milestone Systems A S reserve the right to make adjustments without prior notification All names of people and organizations used in this document s examples are fictitious Any resemblance to any actual organization or person living or dead is purely coincidental and unintended www milestonesys com Copyright Trademarks and Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Contents INTRODUCTION cnica 14 Product Overview oococcococnoronnnrannnrannnrannnrnnnnrnnnnrnnanrnnnnrnnanrnnanrnnanrananennans 14 Several Targeted Components in One 14 WOO ALES wid M 15 REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITES KEEN 16 System RequirementS coomccoonoronnncannnrananrannnrananrnnnnrananrnnnnrananrananrananensa
316. ular event should cause video from a particular camera to stop being displayed in the Matrix recipient even if it is not yet old enough to be pushed out of the Matrix recipient When you have selected an action another red exclamation mark will indicate that there is still some configuration to be done ES Alum Corral Display Y Moton on Back Door West Wing Camera b 1 Fees 4 Right click the action to select which camera to apply the action on Y Alam Cerisal Display Y Motion on Back Doce West Wing Camera b 1 Coma Delete Connect Back Door East Wing Camera Back Door West Wing Camera b Executive Office Cam Camera 1 In this example we have specified that when motion is detected on Camera b the selected Matrix recipient should connect to Camera b EY Alam Central Display Y Moton on Back Door weg Wing Camera b Pp Connect D Door West Wing Caen 5 Repeat as required Bear in mind that you define events and actions for a single Matrix recipient at a time www milestonesys com Page 138 Matrix Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Image Server Administration a tei nn f te uy we som Image Server Administrator Window The Image Server provides access to the surveillance system for door remote users logging in with a Remote Client see page 178 or a queer _ Smart Client see page 175 If the PDA Server see page 179 front pu m
317. uld Be Disabled The Define Exclusion Regions window features a preview image from the camera You define the areas in which motion detection should be disabled in the preview image which is divided into small sections by a grid To define areas in which motion detection should be disabled drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview image while pressing the mouse button down Left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section Selected areas are highlighted in blue Define Exclusion Regions Window s Buttons and Check Boxes The Define Exclusion Regions window features the following buttons Button Description Check Box Set All Lets you quickly select all grid sections in the preview image This may be advantageous if you want to disable motion detection in most areas of the image in which case you can simply clear the few sections in which you do not want to disable motion detection Clear All Lets you quickly clear all grid sections in the preview image Auto By clicking the Auto button you can make XProtect Enterprise automatically detect areas with noise insignificant changes in individual pixels which should www milestonesys com Page 52 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Button Description Check Box not be regarded as motion in the image and automatically mark such areas as areas in which motion detection should be disa
318. ulling out the server s power cable or similar The best way of protecting your surveillance system server from being shut down abruptly is to equip your surveillance system server with a UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply The UPS works as a battery driven secondary power source providing the necessary power for saving open files and safely powering down your system in the event of power irregularities UPSs vary in sophistication but many UPSs include software for automatically saving open files for alerting system administrators etc Selecting the right type of UPS for your organization s environment is an individual process When assessing your needs however do bear in mind the amount of runtime you will require the UPS to be able to provide if the power fails saving open files and shutting down an operating system properly may take several minutes Windows Task Manager Be Careful when Ending Processes When working in Windows Task Manager be careful not to end any processes which affect the surveillance system If you end an application or system service by clicking End Process in the Windows Task Manager the process in question will not be given the chance to save its state or data before it is terminated This may in turn lead to corrupt camera databases Windows Task Manager will typically display a warning if you attempt to end a process Unless you are absolutely sure that ending the process will not affect the surveillance sys
319. ut Output Control ccccococcococnncncnnracancncnnracanrncnnnncnnancnnnnranancananennans 105 LO Control Window se xo a EEN eaten dx re x ERR HE eve dude o dx eden 105 Associating Event with Particular Outputs sees 105 Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window 106 Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion 106 Selecting Output for Manual Control 106 Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection sss 106 HOW tO vee ccceeece ence eee REENEN eee eee 107 How to Add an Input Based Event 107 How to Add an Event Button 108 How to Add a VMD Event 110 How to Add a Generic Event 112 How to Test a Generic Event sssssssssssssssss emnes 114 How to Add a Timer Event 116 How to Add a Manually Controlled Output 118 How to Add a Motion Triggered Output 121 Benefits of Archiving EEN EER KEREN E REENEN ENEE E RENE KREE REENEN ENER E ENER 125 How Archiving Works c mcmccocoococnorocnnracnnrncanrncanrncnnrncnnrncnnrnrnnrncnnrncananes 125 Storing Archives at Other Locations than the Default Archiving Directory 126 Archiving Audio uge Ree EN eere A NEE ENEE REN E YEAR ents 126 www milestonesys com Page 9 Contents Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual m Storage Capacity Required for Archiving sssssssssssssrrrsssrirrrsssrirrrrese 126 Automatic Response if Running Out of Disk Space 127 Backing Up Archives exiit ead e
320. utput Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6 Tip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way You are able to determine each output s position in the Remote Client s and Smart Client s output list by moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down buttons located to the right of the list The selected output is moved up one step each time you click the up button Likewise each time you click the down button the selected output is moved down one step To remove an output from the On Manual Control list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection You are able to select outputs to be triggered automatically when motion is detected in video from the camera 6 Tip This feature does not require that a VMD Video Motion Detection event has been defined for the camera in the I O Setup window see page 86 To select an output for use when motion is detected in video from the camera 1 Select the required output in
321. utton to open the Change Password window see page 79 When an administrator password is in use users accessing the Administrator application or wishing to use protected features must type the administrator password in the window before access is granted Manual Start Recording Settings In the Manual start recordings settings section you can enable the possible to manually start recording in the Smart Client see page 175 Select the check box Enable manual start recording to enable manually start of recording In the Default duration of manual recording secs field you can specify the number of seconds the recording should last Note that the minimum number of seconds you can specify is 30 The Maximum duration of manual recording secs field is reserved for future use Milestone XProtect Central Settings Note Settings in this section are relevant only if you are using Milestone XProtect Central add on product that provides complete overview of surveillance system status and alarms in connection with XProtect Enterprise The Milestone XProtect Central section lets you enable and configure access to the surveillance system from a Milestone XProtect Central server in order to retrieve status information and alarms To enable access from a Milestone XProtect Central server select the Enable Milestone XProtect Central connections check box and click the Settings button to open the Milestone XProtect Central Settings window see
322. vailable down preset positions are presented in the Remote Client and Smart Client see page www milestonesys com 175 In the Remote Client and Smart Client users select preset positions from a list By moving a preset position up or down in the Preset Positions section s list you can thus determine the sequence in which preset positions are presented in the Remote Client s or Smart Client s list Presets Select Preset Page 58 Camera Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Preset Position on Event Section If you have specified input or VMD events see page 86 event buttons see page 96 or generic events see page 100 you are able to make the PTZ camera automatically go to particular preset positions when particular events occur To configure the use of preset positions on events click the Setup button This will open the Event window for preset positions on event see page 59 in which you are able to associate particular preset positions with particular events To use preset positions on event select the Go to preset on event check box Patrolling Section To configure PTZ patrolling the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between several preset positions click the Setup button to go to the Setup PTZ Patrolling window see page 60 PTZ patrolling requires that at least two preset positions have been defined Event Window for PTZ Preset Positions on Eve
323. vent has been specified for a device on your XProtect Enterprise system the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output on page 84 Outputs The Outputs button opens the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window see page 53 in which you are able to specify which outputs e g the sounding of a siren or the switching on of the lights should be associated with motion detection and or with output buttons for manually triggering output when the camera is selected in the Remote Client or Smart Client see page 175 Note The use of outputs requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on your XProtect Enterprise system the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera You specify output events in the I O Setup window see page 86 accessed by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window see page 30 PTZ Present Position PTZ Cameras Only Available only if the camera is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera supporting PTZ preset positions the PTZ Preset Positions button opens PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window see page 56 in which you are able to specify preset positions and patrolling for the camera Note If the Milestone Recording Server service see page 68 is running the button will not be available To make the button available pause the Milestone Recording
324. will not have any impact as long as you are sure you type the required characters 8 Close the Telnet window by clicking the close button in its top right corner 5 9 Goto your Remote Client see page 178 or Smart Client see page 175 If the yellow event notification indicator lights up for the required camera your generic event works as intended How to Add a Timer Event Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event VMD event generic event or event button under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only e A camera starts recording based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds e Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event i e when motion is detected a timer event stops the recording after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes To define a timer event do the following 1 A timer event requires that an input event VMD event generic event or event button has already been defined Begin by selecting the required event or event button If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Input or VMD Event Click the Administrato
325. window see page 30 F Enable Miestone Protect Matix e e D Addres Pot Password Smat The Matrix Configuration window has two tabs alam Comag 10101052 Ge A yer Inexdert Room Deplay 10101053 1224 honey yes e The Config tab lets you define individual computers on which it should be possible to view Matrix triggered Dose content such computers are known as EENS Matrix recipients Name Adhe GG e The Event tab lets you define which m events should trigger which actions in Weg individual Matrix recipients eet Pl m el p cover Enabling Matrix and Defining Matrix Recipients The Config tab is used for enabling Matrix functionality and for defining which computers to display Matrix triggered live video on The Config tab contains the following fields check boxes and buttons Box Button Enable Select check box to enable Matrix functionality Milestone XProtect Matrix List of Lists any already defined Matrix recipients i e computers on which Matrix Defined triggered video can be displayed Matrix recipients To change the properties of an already defined Matrix recipient select the required Matrix recipient make the changes in the fields below the list then click the Update button To remove a Matrix recipient from the list select the unwanted Matrix www milestonesys com Page 135 Matrix Administration Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Box Button
326. window in order to get access to the L9 ce restricted features You will only be asked to specify the administrator password when you open the Administrator application by selecting it from Windows Start menu or by clicking the Administrator shortcut on the desktop This will only be the case when access to the Administrator application has been password protected Administrator Window The Administrator window the main window in the Administrator application is used by the surveillance system administrator for configuring XProtect Enterprise upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras to the system You access the Administrator application by selecting it from Window s Start m menu or by clicking the Administrator shortcut on the desktop Access to 5x the Administrator application may be password protected in which case you vides will be asked to provide the administrator password in the Administrator Login window see above IMPORTANT Changes you make in the Administrator T ta application are not applied on your surveillance system 1 CCS s until you exit the Administrator application This allows you emma I since SS to try out various settings before making them take effect 771 M eomm dame 3 gt O Tip Clicking the icon in the left corner of the UU x gs Administrator window s title bar gives you access to a M emm em riis small menu Selecting About Adm from
327. x to send an e mail alert when the event button is clicked In if this event order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been occurs set up in the E Mail setup window see page 80 Include Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected image from camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event button is www milestonesys com Page 98 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Belg Description clicked in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the event button is clicked In this event order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set occurs up in the SMS settings window see page 82 Edit Event Window for Editing Event Buttons The Edit Event window for editing event buttons lets you edit the DIS mx settings for an existing event button bam ionis RR You access the Edit Event window for editing event buttons from the e PE Event Buttons window see page 96 by first selecting the required event button in the Defined Events list then clicking the Edit selected button deu 9 10 re eos Edit Event Window s Fields The Edit Event window for editing event buttons contains the following fields Field Description Button Read only field displaying the n
328. ximum of 600 000 records or 40 GB per day regardless of what maximum has been defined e Max timespan in database Select this option to limit the database size based on the age of records in the database Specify the required number in neighboring field and select required unit Minutes Hours or Days from the list When records become older than the specified number of minutes hours or days they will automatically be deleted Note A database can contain no more than 600 000 records or 40 GB per day regardless of what maximum age has been defined o Tip You will receive a message if based on the recording frame rate you have specified for the camera XProtect Enterprise detects that the maximum number of allowed records in the database is likely to be reached before the end of the specified time span e Clear Database Click button to delete all records stored in the database for the camera in question Records stored in archived databases will not be affected WARNING Use with caution all records in the database for the camera will be permanently deleted As a security measure you will be asked to confirm that you want to permanently delete all stored records for the camera Note If the Milestone Recording Server service is running the button will not be available To make the button available pause the Milestone Recording Server service by clicking the Administrator window s see page 30 Service Manager button then cli
329. y By using archiving you will also be able to back up archived records on backup media of your choice using your preferred backup software How Archiving Works For each camera for which archiving has been specified the contents of the camera database will be moved to a default archiving directory called Archives This will happen automatically one or more times every day depending on your archiving settings The default archiving directory is located on the computer running the XProtect Enterprise software by default in the directory containing the XProtect Enterprise software typically c program files milestone milestone surveillancel archives In the archiving directory separate sub directories for storing archives for each camera are automatically created These sub directories are named after the MAC address of the device to which the camera is connected Since you are able to keep archives spanning many days of recordings and since archiving may take place several times a day further sub directories named after the archiving date and time are also automatically created The sub directories will be named according to the following structure Archives CameraMACAddress_VideoEncoderChannel DateAndTim Example With the default archiving folder located under C MyFiles MySurveillanceSystem video from an archiving taking place at 23 15 on 1st June 2005 for a camera attached to channel 2 ona video encoder device with
330. y automatically and transparent to users However when a Remote Client or Smart Client on a local network connects to a surveillance system which is also on the local network the Image Server may if different subnets are involved not recognize the Remote Client s or Smart Client s IP address as being local When this is the case the Image Server may not return a suitable IP address to the Remote Client or Smart Client for further communication between the two Therefore you are able to define a list of IP ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network in which case it will respond with a suitable IP address and seamless communication will be possible You are able to limit the number of access clients allowed to connect at the same time Depending on your XProtect Enterprise configuration and the performance of the hardware and network used limiting the number of simultaneously connected clients may help reduce server load If more than the allowed number of simultaneously connected access clients attempt to log in only the allowed number of access clients will be allowed access Any access clients in excess of the allowed number will receive an error message when attempting to log in By default a maximum of ten simultaneously connected access clients are allowed To specify a different maximum number of access clients allowed to connect at the same time overwrite the value in the Max number of clients fi
331. y repeat above process How to Add a Generic Event XProtect Enterprise is able to analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and automatically trigger an event when specified criteria are met This way you are able to easily integrate your XProtect Enterprise surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources for example access control systems alarm systems etc Events based on the analysis of received TCP and or UDP packets are called generic events XProtect Enterprise listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window see page 95 default is port 1234 To add a generic event do the following 1 In the Administrator window see page 30 click the Generic Events button Milestone XProtect Administrator H Device Manager Sece Manage Rae AM Device P PL Gegen Once Can 01 BE Necepter Ces k Y Sen pp E d ve Seem 1101061 Gered oti Arche ta impor DUC Trasa VO Cortal This will open the Generic Events window see page 100 2 In the Generic Events window see page 100 first select the Generic item then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for specifying generic events see page 101 www milestonesys com Page 112 Input Events amp Output Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual 3 Now sp Add Hew vent ecify information in the following fields e arum i Come ttr No aon set
332. you specify the settings for a particular input event on gom devices capable of handling several input events You access the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events TE by clicking the gt gt button in the Multiple Input Events window see page Jed 6 t u rt ccn 90 CE zeg Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check Milestone s release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events contains the following fields Field Check Description Box External Lets you specify a name for the particular input event event name Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Some camera devices only support event names of a certain length and or with a certain structure Refer to the camera s documentation for exact details Send email Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs In order to be if this event able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the occurs E Mail setup window see page 80 Include Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs ch
333. ystems website www milestonesys com for updates at regular intervals in order to make sure you are using the most recent version of XProtect Enterprise www milestonesys com Page 15 Introduction Milestone XProtect Enterprise 6 5 Administrator s Manual Requirements and Prerequisites System Requirements The following are minimum system requirements for running XProtect Enterprise and associated applications Surveillance System Server Operating System CPU RAM Network Graphics Adapter Hard Disk Type Hard Disk Space Software Microsoft Windows 2008 Server 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Windows XP Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Intel Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or higher Core 2 recommended Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit colors E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster Minimum 80 GB free depends on number of cameras and recording settings DirectX 9 0 or newer required to run Playback Viewer application Microsoft NET 1 1 Framework required to run Recording Server Manager To run the PDA Server the following is required Internet Information Server IIS 5 1 or newer as well as Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Information about how to

Milestone XProtect Corporate Administrators Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents